Guide To Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using The U-Net V3R9

Product Version Confidentiality level
V300R009 INTERNAL
Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.
Product Name
Total 466 pages
GENEX U-Net
Guide to Performing LTE Simulation

Operations by Using the U-Net
(INTERNAL)
Prepared By Date
Reviewed By Date
Reviewed By Date
Approved By Date
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved
Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL
Change History
Date Version Description Author
July 20, V1.0 The initial draft of the Qi Huan (ID: 00163940),
2011 WCDMA Simulation Zhang Lei (ID: 00168887),
Operation Guide is Yang Yongde (ID:
completed. 00176546), Lou Kaiwei
(ID: 00148416), Mou
Heping (ID: 00149906),
Nov 25, V2.0 Update to V300R009 and Zhou00225775
liaoyang Fan (ID:
2013 00177485)
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page i of 466

Contents
1 Overview........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Interface Introduction ................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 U-Net Planning Procedure ........................................................................................................... 3
2 U-Net Operations ......................................................................................................... 5

2.1 Creating a Project ......................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Importing Map Data ..................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.1 Importing Map Data Quickly .............................................................................................. 7
2.2.2 Importing Map Data by Layer .......................................................................................... 10
2.2.3 Map Calibration ................................................................................................................ 24
2.2.4 Configuring the Coordinate Display Mode ....................................................................... 24
2.2.5 Setting Map Parameters .................................................................................................... 26
2.3 Importing and Setting Engineering Parameters.......................................................................... 28
2.3.1 Setting Propagation Models .............................................................................................. 28
2.3.2 Importing and Modifying Antenna Information ............................................................... 33
2.3.3 Setting Site Equipment Parameters ................................................................................... 39
2.3.4 Importing Site Information ............................................................................................... 40
2.3.5 Importing Transceiver Information ................................................................................... 46
2.3.6 Setting the Frequency Band .............................................................................................. 50
2.3.7 Importing Cell Information ............................................................................................... 53
2.3.8 Setting the Traffic Model .................................................................................................. 58
2.3.9 Configuring a Traffic Map ................................................................................................ 74
3 Planning and Simulation.......................................................................................... 88

3.1 Prediction ................................................................................................................................... 88
3.1.1 Setting Prediction Parameters ........................................................................................... 88
3.1.2 Setting Prediction Global Parameters ............................................................................. 102
3.1.3 Creating a Prediction Group ........................................................................................... 104
3.1.4 Running the Prediction .................................................................................................... 111
3.1.5 Viewing the Prediction Result......................................................................................... 120
3.1.6 Adjusting Parameters Based on Prediction Results ........................................................ 139
3.1.7 Comparing Prediction Results in Different Scenarios .................................................... 140
3.1.8 Exporting Prediction Results .......................................................................................... 143
3.1.9 Printing Prediction Results ............................................................................................. 143
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page ii of 466
3.1.10 Method 1 ....................................................................................................................... 143

3.1.11 Modifying a Prediction Group ...................................................................................... 145
3.1.12 Deleting a Prediction Group ......................................................................................... 149
3.2 Neighboring Cell Planning ....................................................................................................... 151
3.2.1 Planning Data .................................................................................................................. 151
3.2.2 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning of a New Network..................................................... 153
3.2.3 Neighboring Cell Replanning When Partial Network Is Expanded ................................ 167
3.2.4 Planning Neighboring Cells of 4G Networks Using Neighboring Cells of 2G/3G
Networks .................................................................................................................................. 169
3.2.5 Checking Configurations of Neighboring Cells .............................................................. 172
3.3 PCI Planning ............................................................................................................................ 175
3.3.1 Setting PCI Planning Parameters .................................................................................... 175
3.3.2 PCI Planning of a New/Expanded Network ................................................................... 176
3.3.3 Checking the PCI Planning ............................................................................................. 195
3.4 PRACH Planning ..................................................................................................................... 197
3.4.1 Setting PRACH Planning Parameters ............................................................................. 197
3.4.2 PRANCH Planning of a New Network........................................................................... 199
3.5 Frequency Planning.................................................................................................................. 208
3.5.1 Setting Frequency Planning Parameters ......................................................................... 208
3.5.2 Frequency Planning in 1x1 + ICIC Networking ............................................................. 209
3.5.3 Frequency Planning in 1x3 Networking Mode ............................................................... 219
3.6 RF Planning ............................................................................................................................. 221
3.6.1 Setting Planning Parameters ........................................................................................... 221
3.6.2 Running the RF Planning ................................................................................................ 226
3.6.3 Viewing RF Planning Results ......................................................................................... 228
3.6.4 Exporting RF Planning Results ....................................................................................... 231
3.6.5 Submitting RF Planning Results ..................................................................................... 233
3.7 Capacity Simulation ................................................................................................................. 233
3.7.1 Setting Capacity Simulation Parameters ......................................................................... 233
3.7.2 Creating a Simulation Group .......................................................................................... 241
3.7.3 Running the Simulation Group ....................................................................................... 245
3.7.4 Viewing Capacity Simulation Results ............................................................................. 246
3.7.5 Submitting Capacity Simulation Results ........................................................................ 265
3.7.6 Exporting Capacity Simulation Results .......................................................................... 268
3.8 ASP .......................................................................................................................................... 273
3.8.1 ASP Application Scenarios ............................................................................................. 274
3.8.2 Preparations for the Planning .......................................................................................... 275
3.8.3 Creating an ASP Group ................................................................................................... 278
3.8.4 Setting ASP Parameters .................................................................................................. 279
3.8.5 Executing ASP ................................................................................................................ 291
3.8.6 Stopping ASP .................................................................................................................. 294
3.8.7 Viewing ASP Results ...................................................................................................... 295
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page iii of 466
3.8.8 Displaying ASP Results on the Map ............................................................................... 309

3.9 ACP .......................................................................................................................................... 317
3.9.1 ACP Parameter Preparations ........................................................................................... 317
3.9.2 Creating an ACP Group .................................................................................................. 318
3.9.3 Setting Antenna Combination Parameters ...................................................................... 321
3.9.4 Querying ACP Results .................................................................................................... 326
3.9.5 Displaying ACP Results Geographically ........................................................................ 329
3.9.6 ACP GUI References ...................................................................................................... 333
3.10 ACP-Automatic Cell Planning ............................................................................................... 349
3.10.1 Preparing Data for ACP-Automatic Cell Planning ....................................................... 349
3.10.2 Creating an ACP-Automatic Cell Planning Group ....................................................... 350
3.10.3 Checking ACP-Automatic Cell Planning Results ......................................................... 371
3.10.4 Displaying ACP-Automatic Cell Planning Results on a Map ....................................... 378
4 Appendix ................................................................................................................... 381

4.1 Obtaining Engineering Parameter Templates of the U-Net Quickly ........................................ 381
4.2 Polygon .................................................................................................................................... 384
4.2.1 Creating a Polygon.......................................................................................................... 384
4.2.2 Polygon Operations......................................................................................................... 385
4.2.3 Setting the Properties of a Polygon ................................................................................. 387
4.2.4 Combing Polygons .......................................................................................................... 390
4.2.5 Polygon Usage ................................................................................................................ 392
4.3 Point Analysis .......................................................................................................................... 393
4.3.1 Viewing Signal Statuses from Each Cell to the Point Respectively ................................ 394
4.3.2 Viewing Signal Status from Each Cell to the Point Simultaneously ............................... 396
4.3.3 Viewing Signal Statuses of Pilots and Services of the Best Server Cell ......................... 397
4.4 Print .......................................................................................................................................... 401
4.5 Propagation Model Calibration ................................................................................................ 406
4.5.1 Description of the CW File ............................................................................................. 406
4.5.2 Importing the Bin Point Information .............................................................................. 406
4.5.3 Performing the Propagation Model Calibration .............................................................. 408
4.6 U-Net Map Calibration ............................................................................................................ 410
4.7 Interconnection with the MapInfo ............................................................................................ 412
4.7.1 Polygon ........................................................................................................................... 412
4.7.2 Exporting Prediction Results .......................................................................................... 415
4.8 Interconnection with the Google Earth .................................................................................... 416
4.9 Combining Maps with Different Precisions ............................................................................. 418
4.10 Obtaining the Coordinate System of the Map Based on the Map File ................................... 423
4.11 Tips for Using the U-Net ........................................................................................................ 426
4.11.1 Hiding and Unhiding Columns of a Table..................................................................... 426
4.11.2 Rollback ........................................................................................................................ 427
4.11.3 Custom Fields ............................................................................................................... 428
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page iv of 466

4.11.4 Searching for NEs ......................................................................................................... 431

4.11.5 Moving a Site to a Higher Location .............................................................................. 432
4.11.6 Terrain View .................................................................................................................. 434
4.11.7 Distance Measurement .................................................................................................. 435
4.12 Summary of Propagation Model Parameters.......................................................................... 437
4.12.1 Cost-Hata/Okumura Hata.............................................................................................. 437
4.12.2 Clutter Related Hata ...................................................................................................... 438
4.12.3 SPM .............................................................................................................................. 440
4.12.4 ITURP ........................................................................................................................... 441
4.12.5 Keenan-Motley ............................................................................................................. 442
4.12.6 Volcano ......................................................................................................................... 442
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page v of 466

Figure
Figure 1-1 Main interface of the U-Net............................................................................................. 1

Figure 1-2 U-Net planning procedure ............................................................................................... 3
Figure 2-1 Creating a LTE project (1) ............................................................................................... 5
Figure 2-4 Importing the map data (1) .............................................................................................. 7
Figure 2-9 Setting the coordinate .................................................................................................... 10
Figure 2-10 Selecting a projection ...................................................................................................11
Figure 2-11 Importing a Clutter layer ............................................................................................... 11
Figure 2-12 Importing a Clutter file ................................................................................................ 12
Figure 2-13 Effect after a Clutter is imported ................................................................................. 12
Figure 2-14 Importing a Height layer .............................................................................................. 13
Figure 2-15 Importing a Height file ................................................................................................ 14
Figure 2-16 Effect after a Height file is imported ........................................................................... 14
Figure 2-17 Importing a Building file ............................................................................................. 15
Figure 2-18 Importing a Building file ............................................................................................. 16
Figure 2-19 Effect after a Building file is imported ........................................................................ 16
Figure 2-20 Importing a Vector layer .............................................................................................. 17
Figure 2-21 Importing a Vector file ................................................................................................. 18
Figure 2-22 Effect after a Vector file is imported ............................................................................ 18
Figure 2-23 Importing a Geometry layer ........................................................................................ 19
Figure 2-24 Importing a Geometry file ........................................................................................... 19
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page vi of 466

Figure 2-25 Effect after a Geometry file is imported ...................................................................... 20

Figure 2-26 Importing a text map.................................................................................................... 20
Figure 2-27 Importing a text map.................................................................................................... 21
Figure 2-28 Effect after a text map is imported ............................................................................... 21

Figure 2-29 Importing a satellite picture ......................................................................................... 22
Figure 2-30 Importing a satellite picture ......................................................................................... 22
Figure 2-31 Setting the coordinate location of a satellite picture .................................................... 23

Figure 2-32 Effect after a satellite map is imported ........................................................................ 24
Figure 2-33 Setting the coordinate format of a map ........................................................................ 25
Figure 2-34 Setting the coordinate format of a map ........................................................................ 25

Figure 2-35 Clutter parameter setting (1) ........................................................................................ 26
Figure 2-36 Clutter parameter setting (2) ........................................................................................ 27
Figure 2-37 Setting the propagation model (1) ............................................................................... 33
Figure 2-38 Setting the propagation model (2) ............................................................................... 33
Figure 2-39 Formats of MSI antenna files ...................................................................................... 34
Figure 2-40 Format of a .txt antenna file ......................................................................................... 35
Figure 2-41 Importing antenna information .................................................................................... 36
Figure 2-42 Importing/exporting antenna information .................................................................... 36
Figure 2-43 Antenna file ................................................................................................................. 37
Figure 2-44 Viewing the antenna property ...................................................................................... 38
Figure 2-45 Antenna property window ........................................................................................... 38
Figure 2-46 Setting the Site Equipment (1) ..................................................................................... 39
Figure 2-47 Setting the Site Equipment (2) ..................................................................................... 39
Figure 2-48 Importing site information (1) ..................................................................................... 40
Figure 2-49 Importing site information (2) ..................................................................................... 41

Figure 2-50 Viewing site information (1) ........................................................................................ 42
Figure 2-51 Viewing site information (2) ........................................................................................ 42
Figure 2-52 Setting the display mode of a site ................................................................................ 43
Figure 2-53 Label Display tab page in the Display Field window .................................................. 43
Figure 2-54 Effect after labels are set.............................................................................................. 44
Figure 2-55 Default displaying setting of sites and group division setting ..................................... 45
Figure 2-56 Setting the display mode.............................................................................................. 45
Figure 2-57 Importing transceiver information (1) ......................................................................... 46
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page vii of 466

Figure 2-58 Antenna setting (1)....................................................................................................... 47

Figure 2-61 Transceiver setting (1) ................................................................................................. 49

Figure 2-62 Transceiver setting (2) ................................................................................................. 50
Figure 2-63 Frequency band setting (1) .......................................................................................... 51

Figure 2-66 Importing cell information (1) ..................................................................................... 53
Figure 2-67 Cell parameter setting (1) ............................................................................................ 54

Figure 2-68 Cell parameter setting (2) ............................................................................................ 55
Figure 2-69 Mobility type (1).......................................................................................................... 58
Figure 2-72 Default service types ................................................................................................... 60
Figure 2-73 LTE Service Properties ................................................................................................ 61
Figure 2-74 Creating a service type ................................................................................................ 62
Figure 2-75 Setting terminals .......................................................................................................... 63
Figure 2-76 Creating a terminal type .............................................................................................. 63
Figure 2-77 Defining the reception equipment ............................................................................... 65
Figure 2-78 Displaying the MCS bearer table ................................................................................. 65
Figure 2-79 MCS bearer table ......................................................................................................... 66
Figure 2-80 Default UE Reception Equipment Properties .............................................................. 66
Figure 2-81 Bear Index/Ec/Nt mapping table ................................................................................. 67
Figure 2-82 Default types of user behaviors ................................................................................... 68

Figure 2-83 Creating a user behavior (1) ........................................................................................ 68
Figure 2-84 Creating a user behavior (2) ........................................................................................ 69
Figure 2-85 Comparing user behaviors (1) ..................................................................................... 70
Figure 2-86 Comparing user behaviors (2) ..................................................................................... 70
Figure 2-87 Environments (1) ......................................................................................................... 71

2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page viii of 466

Figure 2-91 Comparing traffic environments (1) ............................................................................ 73

Figure 2-92 Comparing traffic environments (2) ............................................................................ 73
Figure 2-93 Traffic map .................................................................................................................. 74
Figure 2-94 Based on Environments (1) ......................................................................................... 75


Figure 2-98 Vector Traffic Map Properties (1) ................................................................................ 77
Figure 2-99 Vector Traffic Map Properties (2) ................................................................................ 78
Figure 2-100 Vector Traffic Map Properties (3) .............................................................................. 79

Figure 2-101 Adding a vector.......................................................................................................... 79
Figure 2-102 Selecting a vector....................................................................................................... 80
Figure 2-103 Select Map Type ........................................................................................................ 80
Figure 2-104 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties (General) ........................................................... 81
Figure 2-105 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties (Transceiver) ..................................................... 81
Figure 2-106 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties (Traffic) ............................................................. 82
Figure 2-107 Select Map Type ........................................................................................................ 83
Figure 2-108 User Location Traffic Map Properties ....................................................................... 83
Figure 2-109 Importing the user location (1) .................................................................................. 84
Figure 2-110 Importing the user location (2) .................................................................................. 84
Figure 2-111 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties ............................................................................ 86
Figure 2-112 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties............................................................................ 87
Figure 3-1 Prediction properties (1) .............................................................................................. 103

Figure 3-4 Creating a prediction group (1).................................................................................... 105

Figure 3-10 Creating a prediction group (7)...................................................................................110
Figure 3-11 Creating a prediction group (8) ................................................................................... 111
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page ix of 466

Figure 3-12 Calculating a single prediction group .........................................................................112

Figure 3-13 Locking prediction studies ..........................................................................................113
Figure 3-14 Unlocking prediction studies ......................................................................................113
Figure 3-15 Failing to perform the calculation ...............................................................................114

Figure 3-16 Calculating multiple prediction groups.......................................................................115
Figure 3-17 Locking prediction studies ..........................................................................................116
Figure 3-18 Unlocking prediction studies ......................................................................................117

Figure 3-19 Failing to perform the calculation ...............................................................................118
Figure 3-20 Calculation progress ...................................................................................................118
Figure 3-21 Stopping the prediction calculation (1) .......................................................................119

Figure 3-22 Stopping the prediction calculation (2) ...................................................................... 120
Figure 3-23 Example of a prediction map ..................................................................................... 121
Figure 3-24 Setting the legend (1)................................................................................................. 121
Figure 3-28 Exporting MIF/JPG figures in batches (1) ................................................................. 124
Figure 3-29 Exporting MIF/JPG figures in batches (2) ................................................................. 125
Figure 3-30 Items in the shortcut menu for the statistics about a single an indicator .................... 126
Figure 3-31 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a counter (1) .................................................... 126
Figure 3-32 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of an indicator (2) ................................................ 127
Figure 3-33 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of an indicator (1)................................................. 127
Figure 3-34 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of an indicator (2)................................................. 128
Figure 3-35 Items in the shortcut menu for the indicator statistics about a prediction group ....... 129
Figure 3-36 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a prediction group (1) ...................................... 130
Figure 3-37 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a prediction group (2) ...................................... 130
Figure 3-38 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of a prediction group (1) ...................................... 131
Figure 3-39 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of a prediction group (2) ...................................... 132
Figure 3-40 Selecting indicators related to the uplink throughput and downlink throughput ....... 133
Figure 3-41 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a selected uplink or downlink indicator........... 133
Figure 3-42 Exporting a statistics table (1) ................................................................................... 134

2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page x of 466


Figure 3-48 Exporting bin data ..................................................................................................... 137

Figure 3-49 Exporting data by area ............................................................................................... 138
Figure 3-50 Exporting data by DL RSRP ...................................................................................... 139
Figure 3-51 Exporting data by top signal level ............................................................................. 139

Figure 3-52 Copying the prediction group .................................................................................... 140
Figure 3-53 Comparing prediction results (1) ............................................................................... 141

Figure 3-57 Printing PDF figures in batches (1) ........................................................................... 144
Figure 3-58 Printing PDF figures in batches (2) ........................................................................... 145
Figure 3-59 Modifying the properties of a prediction group (1) ................................................... 146
Figure 3-60 Modifying the properties of a prediction group (2) ................................................... 147
Figure 3-61 Adding/deleting prediction studies (1) ....................................................................... 148
Figure 3-62 Adding/deleting prediction studies (2) ....................................................................... 149
Figure 3-63 Deleting the selected prediction group ...................................................................... 150
Figure 3-64 Deleting all single cell prediction groups .................................................................. 151
Figure 3-65 Starting the neighboring cell planning ....................................................................... 154
Figure 3-66 Setting neighboring cell planning parameters (1) ...................................................... 154
Figure 3-67 Filtering cells ............................................................................................................. 156
Figure 3-71 Running the neighboring cell auto-planning ............................................................. 159
Figure 3-72 Stopping neighboring cell auto-planning ................................................................... 160
Figure 3-73 Viewing neighboring cell planning results in tables .................................................. 160
Figure 3-74 Geographically displaying neighboring cells ............................................................ 162
Figure 3-75 Setting the geographical display mode of neighboring cells ..................................... 162
Figure 3-76 Setting the colors of connection lines for the geographical display mode of
neighboring cells ............................................................................................................................ 163
Figure 3-77 Setting cell colors for the geographical display of neighboring cells ........................ 164
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page xi of 466
Figure 3-78 Geographical display of neighboring cells ................................................................ 165

Figure 3-79 Submitting neighboring cell planning results ............................................................ 166
Figure 3-80 Exporting neighboring cell relationships ................................................................... 166
Figure 3-81 Selecting the mode for exporting neighboring cell relationships............................... 166
Figure 3-82 Export files of neighboring cell relationships ............................................................ 167
Figure 3-83 Importing neighboring cell relationships (1) ............................................................. 168
Figure 3-84 Importing neighboring cell relationships (2) ............................................................. 168

Figure 3-85 Importing neighboring cell relationships of 2G/3G networks ................................... 170
Figure 3-86 Referring to neighboring cell relationships of 2G/3G networks ................................ 171
Figure 3-87 Filtering neighboring cell relationships ..................................................................... 172

Figure 3-88 Criteria for filtering neighboring cell relationships ................................................... 173
Figure 3-89 Auditing neighboring cell relationships ..................................................................... 174
Figure 3-90 Criteria for auditing neighboring cell relationships ................................................... 174
Figure 3-91 Result files of auditing neighboring cell relationships .............................................. 175
Figure 3-92 Window for setting the LTE PCI planning ................................................................ 177
Figure 3-93 LTE PCI planning (1) ................................................................................................ 177
Figure 3-96 LTE PCI auto-planning .............................................................................................. 180
Figure 3-97 Example when PCIs are insufficient .......................................................................... 180
Figure 3-98 Displayed message when PCIs are insufficient ......................................................... 181
Figure 3-99 Stopping the LTE PCI auto-planning ......................................................................... 181
Figure 3-100 Viewing LTE PCI planning results .......................................................................... 182
Figure 3-101 Table of LTE PCI results.......................................................................................... 182
Figure 3-102 Viewing LTE PCIs in geographical display mode ................................................... 183
Figure 3-103 Setting the geographical display of PCIs ................................................................. 183
Figure 3-104 Geographical display of LTE PCIs .......................................................................... 184
Figure 3-106 Displaying colors of LTE PCIs in geographical display S mode ............................. 185
Figure 3-107 Displaying colors of LTE PCIs in geographical display mode (color-link) ............. 186
Figure 3-108 Displaying colors of LTE PCIs in geographical display mode (color-cell) ............. 187
Figure 3-110 Adjusting existing PCIs ........................................................................................... 189
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page xii of 466

Figure 3-111 Submitting LTE PCI planning results ...................................................................... 189

Figure 3-112 Exporting LTE PCI planning results ........................................................................ 190
Figure 3-113 Template of exporting PCI planning results ............................................................. 190
Figure 3-114 Exporting the cluster information about PCIs that support the segmental capacity
expansion ....................................................................................................................................... 191
Figure 3-115 Template for exporting PCI planning results (cluster information) ......................... 191
Figure 3-116 Filtering LTE PCIs ................................................................................................... 192
Figure 3-117 Filtering LTE PCI results ......................................................................................... 192

Figure 3-118 Auditing LTE PCI results ......................................................................................... 193
Figure 3-119 Setting the auditing of LTE PCI results ................................................................... 194
Figure 3-120 Displaying the statistics of LTE PCI results ............................................................ 195
Figure 3-121 Importing the cell PCI information .......................................................................... 196
Figure 3-122 Checking PCIs ......................................................................................................... 197
Figure 3-123 Window for setting PRACH parameters .................................................................. 199
Figure 3-124 Window for setting parameters ................................................................................ 200
Figure 3-125 Filtering planning cells ............................................................................................ 201
Figure 3-126 Running the PRACH auto-planning ........................................................................ 201
Figure 3-127 Window of the PRACH planning result .................................................................. 202
Figure 3-128 Displaying the window of the planning result ......................................................... 203
Figure 3-129 Viewing the planning result on the GIS map (1) ..................................................... 203
Figure 3-132 Selecting LTE PRACH Planning ............................................................................. 205
Figure 3-133 Displaying transceivers that have reuse relationship with the selected transceiver on
the GIS map ................................................................................................................................... 205
Figure 3-134 Setting the number of reuse tiers to be checked (1) ................................................. 206
Figure 3-137 Manually adjusting planning results (1) .................................................................. 207
Figure 3-138 Manually adjusting planning results (2) .................................................................. 207
Figure 3-139 Submitting planning results ..................................................................................... 207
Figure 3-140 Exporting planning results (1) ................................................................................. 208
Figure 3-141 Exporting planning results (2) ................................................................................. 208

Figure 3-142 Displaying the window of setting planning parameters ........................................... 209
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page xiii of 466

Figure 3-143 Window of setting planning parameters .................................................................. 210

Figure 3-144 Filtering planning cells ............................................................................................. 211
Figure 3-145 Window of selecting bands and frequencies ............................................................ 212
Figure 3-146 Planning result window ........................................................................................... 213

Figure 3-147 Exporting planning results ....................................................................................... 214
Figure 3-148 Displaying the frequency statistics window ............................................................ 214
Figure 3-149 Window of statistics of planning results (1) ............................................................ 215

Figure 3-150 Window of statistics of planning results (2) ............................................................ 216
Figure 3-151 Window of setting the rendering color on the GIS map .......................................... 216
Figure 3-152 Displaying auditing results on the GIS map ............................................................ 217
Figure 3-153 Displaying frequency planning results on the GIS map (1) ..................................... 218
Figure 3-157 Displaying the parameter setting window ............................................................... 220
Figure 3-158 Setting the 1x3 networking mode ............................................................................ 220
Figure 3-159 Creating a RF planning group.................................................................................. 221
Figure 3-160 General tab page in the RF Planning window ......................................................... 222
Figure 3-161 Setting the thresholds of RSRP and RS SINR ......................................................... 223
Figure 3-162 Location relations of simulation areas and analysis areas ....................................... 224
Figure 3-163 Control Parameter tab page in the RF Planning window ......................................... 225
Figure 3-164 Running the RF planning ......................................................................................... 227
Figure 3-165 Interface during the RF planning ............................................................................. 227
Figure 3-166 Displaying RF planning results ............................................................................... 228
Figure 3-167 General tab page in the RF Result window ............................................................. 229
Figure 3-168 Graph tab page in the RF Result window ................................................................ 229
Figure 3-169 Cell Parameters tab page in the RF Result window ................................................. 230
Figure 3-170 Quality tab page in the RF Result window — RSRP coverage prediction figure .... 231
Figure 3-171 Quality tab page in the RF Result window — RS SINR coverage prediction figure
....................................................................................................................................................... 231
Figure 3-172 Exporting RF planning results ................................................................................. 232
Figure 3-173 Format for exporting RF planning results ................................................................ 232

Figure 3-174 Dialog box displayed after clicking Commit ........................................................... 233
Figure 3-175 Creating a simulation group (1) ............................................................................... 242

2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page xiv of 466

Figure 3-179 Running a simulation group (1) ............................................................................... 245

Figure 3-180 Running a simulation group (2) ............................................................................... 245
Figure 3-181 Viewing simulation results on the entire network (1) .............................................. 246
Figure 3-185 Viewing simulation results of a snapshot (1) ........................................................... 252

Figure 3-190 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (1) ....................................................... 256
Figure 3-199 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (10) ..................................................... 260
Figure 3-200 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (11) ..................................................... 261
Figure 3-201 Viewing the statistics results of capacity simulation in a PDF or CDF chart (1) ..... 262
Figure 3-204 Viewing the average result of multiple network systems (1) ................................... 265
Figure 3-205 Viewing the average result of multiple network systems (2) ................................... 265
Figure 3-206 Submitting the average result of multiple snapshots to NEs (1) .............................. 266
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page xv of 466

Figure 3-209 Submitting the result a single snapshot to NEs (1) .................................................. 267
Figure 3-212 Exporting simulation results in batches (1) ............................................................. 268


Figure 3-217 Exporting a single statistics result of the simulation (1) .......................................... 271
Figure 4-1 Exporting the engineering parameter template ............................................................ 382
Figure 4-2 Exporting the engineering parameter template of a site .............................................. 383
Figure 4-3 Exporting the engineering parameter template of a transceiver .................................. 383
Figure 4-4 Exporting the engineering parameter template of a cell .............................................. 384
Figure 4-5 Creating a polygon (1) ................................................................................................. 385
Figure 4-8 Polygon operations ...................................................................................................... 386
Figure 4-9 Polygon operations ...................................................................................................... 386
Figure 4-10 Viewing properties of a polygon ................................................................................ 387
Figure 4-11 Displaying the properties of a polygon ...................................................................... 387

Figure 4-12 Polygon properties (1) ............................................................................................... 388
Figure 4-16 Polygon operations (1)............................................................................................... 390

Figure 4-19 Polygon usage ............................................................................................................ 393
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page xvi of 466

Figure 4-20 Point analysis (1) ....................................................................................................... 394



Figure 4-29 Point analysis (10) ..................................................................................................... 398

Figure 4-33 Entrance for printing setting ...................................................................................... 401
Figure 4-34 Printing setting window (1) ....................................................................................... 402
Figure 4-38 Print preview/print (1) ............................................................................................... 405
Figure 4-39 Print preview/print (2) ............................................................................................... 405
Figure 4-40 CW data file ............................................................................................................... 406
Figure 4-41 Entrance for importing DT data ................................................................................. 407
Figure 4-42 Window for importing the CW data .......................................................................... 407
Figure 4-43 Project display after the CW data is imported ........................................................... 408
Figure 4-44 Starting the propagation model calibration from the navigation tree ........................ 409
Figure 4-45 Window for setting the propagation model calibration .............................................. 409
Figure 4-46 Result of propagation model calibration .................................................................... 410
Figure 4-47 Map calibration (1) .....................................................................................................411
Figure 4-48 Map calibration (2) .....................................................................................................411
Figure 4-49 Map calibration (3) .................................................................................................... 412
Figure 4-50 Exporting polygons in MIF format (1) ...................................................................... 413

Figure 4-51 Exporting polygons in MIF format (2) ...................................................................... 413
Figure 4-52 Importing polygons in MIF format (1) ...................................................................... 414
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page xvii of 466

Figure 4-53 Importing polygons in MIF format (2) ...................................................................... 414

Figure 4-54 Exporting prediction results (1) ................................................................................. 415
Figure 4-55 Exporting prediction results (2) ................................................................................. 416
Figure 4-56 Interconnection with the Google Earth (1) ................................................................ 416
Figure 4-59 Relations of maps with four precisions...................................................................... 419

Figure 4-60 Prediction before maps are combined ........................................................................ 419
Figure 4-61 Volcano map parameter settings ................................................................................ 420
Figure 4-62 Clutter ID description before maps are combined ..................................................... 421
Figure 4-63 Clutter ID description after maps are combined. ....................................................... 422
Figure 4-64 Prediction figure of the combined map...................................................................... 423
Figure 4-65 Format of the Projection file ...................................................................................... 424
Figure 4-66 Setting the projection system (1) ............................................................................... 425
Figure 4-69 Selecting a coordinate system .................................................................................... 426
Figure 4-70 Cell table.................................................................................................................... 427
Figure 4-71 Selecting the properties to be displayed .................................................................... 427
Figure 4-72 Performing the rollback on the GIS map ................................................................... 428
Figure 4-73 Custom fields (1) ....................................................................................................... 429
Figure 4-77 Searching for NEs (1) ................................................................................................ 432

Figure 4-78 Searching for NEs (2) ................................................................................................ 432
Figure 4-79 Moving a site to a higher location (1) ........................................................................ 433
Figure 4-82 Viewing the terrain profile (1) ................................................................................... 434
Figure 4-83 Viewing the terrain profile (2) ................................................................................... 435

Figure 4-84 Distance measurement (1) ......................................................................................... 435
Figure 4-85 Distance measurement (2) ......................................................................................... 436
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page xviii of 466

Figure 4-86 Cost-Hata/Okumura Hata parameter window ............................................................ 437

Figure 4-87 Clutter Related Cost Hata parameter window ........................................................... 438
Figure 4-88 Clutter Related Okumura Hata parameter window .................................................... 439
Figure 4-89 SPM parameter window ............................................................................................ 440

Figure 4-90 ITURP parameter window ......................................................................................... 441
Figure 4-91 Keenan-Motley parameter window ........................................................................... 442
Figure 4-92 Volcano model setting (1) .......................................................................................... 443

2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page xix of 466

LTE U-Net Operation Guide
1 Overview
The U-Net is a type of wireless network planning software developed by Huawei.

The U-Net runs on the Windows operating system and supports both 2G and 3G
technologies. The user interface is flexible.
1.1 Interface Introduction

Figure 1-1 shows the main interface of the U-Net.
Figure 1-1 Main interface of the U-Net
Explorer window: The Explorer window is used to display the project

information. The Explorer window is organized into four sections, GEO, Data,
Network, and Operation. You can choose Window > Project Information to
hide or display the project information.
2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page 1 of 466

GEO tab page ( ): manages data and operations related to vectors (polygons,
points, and lines), and electrical maps.
Data tab page ( ): manages data and operations related to propagation

models, services, traffic, and antennas.
Network tab page ( ): manages all network element (NE) parameters, such
as Site, Transceiver, Cell, Repeater, Frequency Band, and Equipment.
Operation tab page ( ): manages data and operations related to the

simulation and planning.
Map window: displays map data, sites, cells, vectors such as polygons, points,
and lines, and planning results.
Task tool bar: indicates various tool buttons on the tool bar and plays functions
such as deploying base stations, automatically deploying base stations, moving a
map, zooming in or zooming out on the map, and drawing vectors (polygons,
points, and lines).
System status bar: displays geodetic coordinate, longitude/latitude coordinate,
clutter class, and altitude corresponding to the current cursor, the number of
deployed base station, and the number of deployed cells.

1.2 U-Net Planning Procedure

Figure 1-2 U-Net planning procedure
Create a project
Set the map projection
Import a map
Calibrate the map
Set (or calibrate) the

propagation model
Import and set antenna

information
Set equipment parameters
Import and set the site

information
Set NE Import and set the

parameters transceiver information
Set the frequency band
Import and set cell

Set traffic parameters information
Frequency/Neighboring Create traffic Predict the

Cell/ PCI/PRACH/RF/TAC maps network
planning performance
Perform the
capacity
simulation
Output the network planning

result
Figure 1-2 shows the basic operation procedure for a complete planning project.
During the planning and the simulation, set all parameters to avoid unnecessary
faults by referring to the following steps:
1. Start the U-Net and choose File > New. On the displayed Project Templates
window, choose LTE-FDD or LTE-TDD to create a simulation project.
2. Set the map coordinate system and imports the maps named Clutter, Height,
Building, and Vector. Set the model standard deviation and indoor
penetration loss based on the clutter.
3. Set the propagation model.
4. Import the antenna data: Import the antenna data independently or in batches
according to the actual situation.
5. Define device properties such as site devices, Tower Mounted Amplifier
(TMA), and antenna feeders.
6. Import site information.
7. Import and edit transceiver information.
8. Define the frequency band.

9. Import and edit the cell information.
10. Set traffic parameters, including the service type, terminal and mobility, user
behaviors, traffic environment, and traffic maps. Default settings of the
U-Net can be used if no special requirements are specified.
User behaviors, traffic environment, and traffic maps are not required to be set if the
environment-based traffic maps are not prepared or the simulation is not performed.
11. Set parameters of the reception equipment, including uplink/downlink
Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) and demodulation threshold. Default
settings of the U-Net can be used if no special requirements are specified.
12. Perform the simulation. Skip this step if no simulation is required.
13. Perform the frequency/neighboring cell/PCI/PRACH/RF/TAC planning.
Skip this step if no planning is required.
14. Perform the coverage prediction.

2 U-Net Operations
This chapter describes the procedure for creating a complete project in the
U-Net.
2.1 Creating a Project

Start the U-Net. Click the button for creating a project on the upper left
window or choose File > New. The Project Templates window is displayed,
as shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 Creating a LTE project (1)

In the displayed Project Templates window, there are five network systems,
namely, CDMA, GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD. Select
LTE-FDD or LTE-TDD and click OK to create a new LTE project, as shown
in Figure 2-3.
2.2 Importing Map Data

The U-Net supports the import of map data both by layer and by choosing
Quick Import. The U-Net supports the import of digital maps in standard
planet, grc/grd, bil, and tab formats for the planning and supports the import
of digital maps in shp and mif formats as the GEO information. The U-Net
supports the following layers:
 Clutter (clutter information, such as open and water).
 Height (altitude information).

 Building (building height information).

 Vector (vector information, such as highroads and railways).
 Geometry (vector information). Essentially, the information is the same
as that on the Vector map. Information in this layer does not participate
in the calculation and is used for demonstration only.
 Text layer (vector point information, for example, institutions such as
markets and schools that can be represented in vector points).
 Satellite layer (picture information, such as satellite pictures and Google
pictures).
The most frequently-used layers that affect the accuracy of the simulation are
the Clutter layer, Height layer, and Building layer. When the ray propagation
model is used, besides the preceding necessary layers, the Vector layer is
mandatory. In this scenario, the 3D Vector layer is recommended. In other
scenarios, the Vector layer is used for demonstration only. In the U-Net, other
layers, such as the Geometry layer, Text layer, and Satellite Layer, are used for
demonstration only and do not affect the simulation and planning.
2.2.1 Importing Map Data Quickly

The map data in standard planet format can be quickly imported to the U-Net
using the quick import function. The U-Net can intelligently identify each
layer and automatically sets the coordinate system based on the map
information.
Maps in standard planet format include the Height layer, Clutter layer,
Building layer, Vector layer. Generally, the projection.txt file indicates the
file for saving the projection information and is saved in the Height layer. The
procedure for quickly importing the map data is as follows:
Step 1 Switch to the GEO tab page.
Figure 2-4 Importing the map data (1)
Step 2 Right-click Map in the navigation tree and choose Quick Import.

Step 3 In the displayed dialog box, browse the root directory of the map or directly
enter the complete absolute path of the map. Then, click OK.
Step 4 On the displayed Import Map window, the map file information that is
automatically read by the U-Net is displayed. You can modify the path,

choose not to import a grid layer, or manually modify the projection

information. Then, click OK.
Step 5 The effect after a map file is imported is shown in Figure 2-8.

----End
2.2.2 Importing Map Data by Layer

Except for maps in planet format, maps in other formats supported by the
U-Net must be imported by layer. If the latitude and longitude information is
used during the planning, you need to manually set the projection system.
Setting the Coordinate System

Switch to the GEO tab page. Right-click Map in the navigation tree and
choose Coordinate.
Figure 2-9 Setting the coordinate
Select a proper coordinate system record based on the map information. Select
a corresponding coordinate system group from the Find in drop-down list
based on the continent on the map. Select a proper coordinate system based on
the nation/region on the map together with the Region column. Then,
determine the coordinate system based on the central longitude.
After selecting the required coordinate system record, click Properties to
view the coordinate system information and click Apply to apply the selected
coordinate system to the project.

Figure 2-10 Selecting a projection
Importing a Clutter Layer

The U-Net supports clutter layers in planet, grc, bil, and tab formats. The
procedure for importing a Clutter layer is as follows:
Step 1 Right-click Clutter under Map in the navigation tree. Then, choose Import,
Figure 2-11 Importing a Clutter layer
Step 2 Select the Clutter map file to be imported and click Open, as shown in Figure
2-12.

Figure 2-12 Importing a Clutter file
Figure 2-13 Effect after a Clutter is imported
----End

Importing a Height Layer

The U-Net supports Height layers in planet, grd, bil, and tab formats. The
procedure for importing a Heights layer is as follows:
Step 1 Right-click Heights under Map in the navigation tree. Then, choose Import,
Figure 2-14 Importing a Height layer
Step 2 Select the Height map file to be imported and click Open, as shown in Figure
2-15.

Figure 2-15 Importing a Height file
Figure 2-16 Effect after a Height file is imported

----End
Importing a Building Layer

The U-Net supports Building layers in planet and bil formats. The procedure
for importing a Building layer is as follows:
Step 1 Right-click Buildings under Map in the navigation tree. Then, choose Import,
Figure 2-17 Importing a Building file
Step 2 Select the Building map file to be imported and click Open, as shown in
Figure 2-18.

Figure 2-18 Importing a Building file
Figure 2-19 Effect after a Building file is imported
----End

Importing a Vector Layer

The U-Net supports Vector layers in planet and tab formats. The procedure for
importing a Vector layer is as follows:
Step 1 Right-click Vector under Map in the navigation tree. Then, choose Import,
Figure 2-20 Importing a Vector layer
Step 2 Select the Vector map file to be imported and click Open, as shown in Figure
2-21.

Figure 2-21 Importing a Vector file
Figure 2-22 Effect after a Vector file is imported
Importing a Geometry Map

The U-Net supports Geometry layers in shp and mif formats. The procedure
for importing a Geometry layer is as follows:

Step 1 Right-click Geometry under Map in the navigation tree. Then, choose
Import, as shown in Figure 2-23.
Figure 2-23 Importing a Geometry layer
Step 2 Select the Geometry map file to be imported and click Open, as shown in
Figure 2-24:
Figure 2-24 Importing a Geometry file

Figure 2-25 Effect after a Geometry file is imported
----End
Importing a Text Map

The U-Net supports text layers in planet formats. The procedure for importing
a text layer is as follows:
Step 1 Right-click Text under Map in the navigation tree. Then, click Import, as
shown in Figure 2-26.
Figure 2-26 Importing a text map

Step 2 Select the text map file to be imported and click Open, as shown in Figure
2-27.
Figure 2-27 Importing a text map
Figure 2-28 Effect after a text map is imported
----End
Importing a Satellite Picture

The U-Net supports the import of satellite pictures in png, bmp, and jpg
formats. When importing a satellite picture, you need to set the latitude and
longitude or geodetic coordinate of the location in the picture to match the
actual location in the map. The procedure for importing a satellite picture is as
follows:
Step 1 Right-click Satellite under Map in the navigation tree. Then, click Import, as
Figure 2-29 Importing a satellite picture
Step 2 Select the satellite file to be imported and click Open, as shown in Figure
2-30.
Figure 2-30 Importing a satellite picture
Step 3 Set the location of the picture. After a picture is imported, the property setting
window is automatically displayed, as shown in Figure 2-31.

Figure 2-31 Setting the coordinate location of a satellite picture
 Bound Type: Bound Type can be set to Long/Lat or X/Y. Long/Lat

indicates that the coordinates at the boundary are longitude/latitude
coordinates. X/Y indicates that the coordinates at the boundary are
geodetic coordinates.
 West: indicates the western boundary of a satellite map and is either a
longitude/latitude coordinate or a geodetic coordinate.
 North: indicates the northern boundary of a satellite map and is either a
 East: indicates the eastern boundary of a satellite map and is either a
 South: indicates the southern boundary of a satellite map and is either a
 Transparency: indicates the transparency of a satellite map.
Move the cursor to the picture. When appears, drag the cursor to adjust
the position of the picture.
Move the cursor to the boundary of the picture. When or appears,

drag the cursor to adjust the size of the picture.
After the preceding settings are complete, click OK. The effect is as follows:

Figure 2-32 Effect after a satellite map is imported
----End
2.2.3 Map Calibration

After a map is imported, the location of a layer can be manually adjusted by
using the map calibration function if the Clutter layer, Height layer, or
Building layer have location deviation with each other, or have location
deviation with the imported engineering parameters. For details about how to
use the map correction function, see section 4.5 "Propagation Model
Calibration."
2.2.4 Configuring the Coordinate Display Mode

After a map is imported, you can select a mode for displaying the coordinate
system on the GIS map (displaying longitude/latitude coordinates or
displaying geodetic coordinates). The operation procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Right-click Map in the navigation tree and choose Map Setting.

Figure 2-33 Setting the coordinate format of a map
Step 2 In the displayed dialog box, select a coordinate display mode. There are four
display modes, including geodetic coordinates and longitude/latitude
coordinates (three display modes of longitude/latitude coordinates). You can
also set the decimal digits of the displayed longitude/latitude in
longitude/latitude coordinates in the status bar.
Figure 2-34 Setting the coordinate format of a map
Parameters in the Coordinate Setting dialog box are as follows:

 Coordinate Style
− xy reference frame: indicates the display mode of geodetic
coordinates.
− xxdxxmxx.xxxsS: indicates the display mode of longitude/latitude
coordinates in the format of xx degree.xx minute.xx second, such as
105°31'57''.
− xx.xxxxS: indicates the ESWN display mode of longitude/latitude
coordinates, such as 106.61E.
− -xx.xxxx: indicates the negative/positive display mode of
longitude/latitude coordinates. West longitudes and south latitudes are

displayed as negative longitudes; east longitudes and north latitudes

are displayed as positive coordinates.
 BL Style Precision: When the coordinate display mode is xy reference
frame and xxdxxmxx.xxsS, BL Style Precision indicates the display
precision of coordinates.
2.2.5 Setting Map Parameters

After a map is imported, you need to set clutter parameters to make the
simulation result more accurate. The operation procedure is as follows:
Step 1 On the Project Explorer pane, right-click GEO under Map and choose
Parameter Management.
Figure 2-35 Clutter parameter setting (1)
Step 2 The Clutter Parameters Display window is displayed, as shown in Figure

2-36.

Figure 2-36 Clutter parameter setting (2)
Parameters on the Actual Value tab page are as follows:

 Code: indicates the number of a clutter class. The value depends on the
geographic data.
 Name: indicates the name of a clutter class. The value depends on the
geographic data.
 Clutter Height: indicates the average height of clutters of each type and
is mainly used to calculate the impact of the clutter height on the path
loss.
 Spatial Multiplexer Factor: indicates the spatial multiplexing factor.
Usually, the default value is 1 and it is unnecessary to change the
parameter value. This parameter is not directly related to the
Multiple-Input Multiple-Out-put (MIMO). However, this parameter,
together with the MIMO gain, participates in the calculation of peak
throughput on the downlink traffic channel. By default, the default value
of this parameter is used.
 Penetration Loss: indicates the penetration loss of clutters of each type.
This parameter needs to be set as required in the scenario of indoor
simulation and participates in the calculation of link loss. The parameter
value provided in this document is an experience value. The parameter
value varies according to the actual situation. Generally, each subregion
has its own experience value.
 Model Standard deviation: indicates the standard deviation of the slow
fading margin. This parameter is used for the calculation of the receiving
power. The parameter value provided in this document is an experience
value and can be changed according to the actual situation.
 Shadow Corr: indicates the factor of shadow fading. The default value
is 0.5.

 C/(I+N) Standard deviation: indicates the standard deviation based on

C/(I + N) and reflects the impact of the shadow fading on C/(I + N).
Usually, the value of C/(I+N) Standard deviation is 2 to 4 dB smaller
than that of Model Standard deviation. This parameter participates in
the calculation of the Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) and is used to adjust
parameters covering the prediction of Signal to Interference plus Noise
Ratio (SINR) counters.
You need to pay attention to the values of Penetration Loss and Model Standard
deviation corresponding to each clutter type. For other parameters, use the default
values. Model Standard Deviation is set according to the normal standard deviation
of the shadow fading. You can refer to the default value for the link. C/(I+N)
Standard Deviation is used to calculate the standard deviation of the shadow fading
during the SINR. Generally, the value of C/(I+N) Standard Deviation is 2 to 4 dB
smaller than that of Model Standard Deviation to achieve better SINR prediction
results.
----End
2.3 Importing and Setting Engineering Parameters

2.3.1 Setting Propagation Models
The U-Net provides multiple propagation models, such as Okumura-Hata
model, Cost-Hata model, SPM model (standard propagation model defined by
the U-Net), ITU RP model, Keenan-Montly mode, and Volcano models.
Before using Volcano modes, you need to install Volcano plug-ins and
purchase license files. Currently, the U-Net supports Volcano 3.0. When
performing the planning simulation, you need to set different propagation
model parameters based on different scenarios and areas. Table 2-1 describes
the application scenarios of propagation models in the U-Net.

Table 2-1 Application scenarios of propagation models in the U-Net
Propagation Band Factor Configuration Recommend

Model Requirements ed
Application
Scenario
Cost-Hata 1500 Terrain condition. Whether to calculate the 1 km < Cell
model MHz to Clutter statistics. diffraction. radius < 20
(including the 2000 Limited by the free km
Cost-Hata MHz A formula
corresponds to a space loss.
HW model)
clutter. Loss in municipal areas. Applicable to
the
GSM1800,
UMTS, and
LTE
technologies.
Not
applicable to
highly
populated
urban areas
but applicable
to common
urban areas,
suburbs, and
villages. In
addition, the
antenna of the
base station
must be
higher than
the
surrounding
buildings.
Usually used
for coverage
prediction and
rarely used for
capacity
simulation.


Application
Scenario
Okumura 150 MHz Terrain condition. Whether to calculate the 1 km < Cell
Hata model to 2000 Clutter statistics. diffraction. radius < 20
(including the MHz Limited by the free km
Okumura A formula
corresponds to a space loss.
Hata HW
model) clutter. Loss in municipal areas. Applicable to
the GSM900,
CDMA2000,
and LTE
technologies.
Not
applicable to
highly
populated
urban areas
but applicable
to common
urban areas,
suburbs, and
villages. In
addition, the
antenna of the
base station
must be
higher than
the
surrounding
buildings.
Usually used
for coverage
prediction and
rarely used for
capacity
simulation.


Application
Scenario
SPM model 150 MHz Terrain condition. The diffraction weight 0.5 km < Cell
(including the to 2000 Clutter statistics. is differentiated in the radius < 20
SPM900 and MHz case of LOS or NLOS. km
SPM2G Effective antenna
height. Limited by the free
models) space loss.
There are six Applicable to
methods of Loss and weight of each the GSM900,
calculating the type of clutter. GSM1800,
effective antenna Clearance area of the UMTS,
height. receiver. CDMA2000,
WiMAX, and
LTE
technologies.
Compared
with the Hata
models, the
SPM models
are widely
applicable to
the scenarios
of macro
cells.
Widely used
for capacity
simulation.
ITURP model 1800 Distance (LOS and Propagation scenarios Indoor
(that is, 1238 MHz to NLOS) and are classified into LOS scenarios.
model) 2000 frequency. and NLOS scenarios.
MHz Margin of slow The margin of slow Used only for
fading. fading depends on the the coverage
NLOS considers the requirement on the prediction.
loss in penetration coverage probability
through floors in and the standard
different deviation of indoor slow
environments. The fading.
loss depends on the In the cases of
number of residential buildings,
penetrated floors. office buildings, and
NLOS considers the malls, N is 28, 30, and
distance loss 22, respectively.
coefficient N.


Application
Scenario
Keenan-Motl Around Distance and Indoor
ey 2000 frequency. scenarios.
MHz Loss in penetration Used only for
through walls. the coverage
Number of walls. prediction.
The impact of
multi-path
propagation is not
considered. The
penetration loss of
each wall is the
same.
Volcano 2G, 3G, Distance and When the multi-path Densely
and 4G frequency. propagation is enabled, populated
frequenc Loss in penetration the building information urban areas
y bands through walls. must be available for with many
assisting the calculation. buildings.
Comprehensively
consider the impact
of multi-path
propagation such as
reflection and
diffraction during
the propagation of
wireless signals
among buildings.
When conditions permit, you can obtain accurate parameters by using the
propagation model calibration function. For details about the method of using
the propagation model calibration function, see section 4.4 "Print." If the
propagation model calibration function cannot be used, you can select the
default propagation model in the U-Net to perform the simulation based on
the band and scenario. The procedure for setting the propagation model is as
follows:
Step 1 Click Data to switch to the Data tab page. Then, unfold the Propagation
Models node.

Figure 2-37 Setting the propagation model (1)
Step 2 Unfold subnodes under Propagation Models to select a propagation model

for a concrete scenario. Take the setting of the Cost231-Hata model as an
example. Right-click Cost231-Hata and choose Properties or double-click
Cost231-Hata. The dialog box for setting propagation model parameters is
displayed.
Figure 2-38 Setting the propagation model (2)
You can manually modify parameters or calculation formulas by clicking

Formula. For details about parameters for propagation modes of each type,
see Appendix 4.12.
----End
2.3.2 Importing and Modifying Antenna Information

The U-Net supports the import of antenna files in .msi (a general antenna
format accepted by the industry), .txt (a format supported by the U-Net),
and .iAntes (a format supported by the U-Net) formats.
 Msi indicates files with the suffix of msi. A MSI file corresponds to
antennas of one type.
The U-Net supports the import of the MSI files of the following formats:
Figure 2-39 Formats of MSI antenna files
 Txt indicates the files in plain text formats. A TXT file corresponds to
antennas of one type.
The format of .txt files that can be imported by the U-Net is as follows:

Figure 2-40 Format of a .txt antenna file
 IAntes: A iAntes file corresponds to antennas of one group.

The procedure for importing an antenna file is as follows:
Step 1 Click Data to switch to the Data tab page. Unfold the Antennas node.

Figure 2-41 Importing antenna information
Step 2 Right-click Antennas and choose Import. You can also perform other
operations such as creating an antenna file, opening an antenna worksheet,
sequencing the data, and exporting the data.
Figure 2-42 Importing/exporting antenna information
Step 3 On the displayed Import Antenna Files dialog box, select the format
(txt/mis/iAntes) of antenna files to be imported. You can import multiple files
at the same time.

Figure 2-43 Antenna file
The U-Net allows the import of antenna files with the same name but automatically
adds digital suffixes to file names. When importing an antenna file, the U-Net does
not read antenna names contained in the file but names the antenna based on the name
of the imported antenna file.
The U-Net is format sensitive. If the file formats are not supported by the
U-Net, errors may easily occur. After obtaining antenna files, you are advised
to open these files to check whether their formats are supported by the U-Net.
Modify the file formats if the file formats are not supported by the U-Net.
The number of antenna files whose formats are fully supported by the U-Net is small.
Therefore, the success rate is low if these files are directly imported to the U-Net. You
are advised to manually edit the file formats. Copy a built-in antenna file of the U-Net,
copy and paste the angle shading value of the target antenna to the antenna file, and
fill in related information.
Step 4 View or change the antenna information.

After the antenna information is imported, you can view or change the
antenna information by double-clicking an antenna file or right-clicking an
antenna file and choose Properties to display the antenna property window:

Figure 2-44 Viewing the antenna property
Figure 2-45 Antenna property window
Parameters in the antenna property window are described as follows:

 General tab page
− Name: indicates the name of an antenna.
− Manufacturer: indicates the vendor of an antenna.
− Gain: indicates the antenna gain.
− Pattern Electrical Tilt: indicates the electrical downtilt of an
antenna.
− Comments: indicates the comments of an antenna.

 Horizontal Pattern/Vertical Pattern tab page: displays the attenuation

value at the horizontal/vertical angle of an antenna.
− Angle: indicates the angle of an antenna.
− Attenuation: indicates the attenuation value at the horizontal/vertical
angle of an antenna.
 Other Properties tab page
− Beamwidth: indicates the antenna beamwidth.
− Max Frequency: indicates the maximum frequency of an antenna.
− Min Frequency: indicates the minimal frequency of an antenna.
----End
2.3.3 Setting Site Equipment Parameters

Setting the Site Equipment
Site Equipment is mainly refers to the noise coefficient on the base station
side. The operation procedure is as follows:
On the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, click to switch to the

Network tab page. Right-click Transceiver and choose Equipment > Site
Equipment. The Site Equipment window is displayed.
Figure 2-46 Setting the Site Equipment (1)
Figure 2-47 Setting the Site Equipment (2)

Parameters are described as follows:

 Name: indicates the name of a device.
 Noise Figure(db): indicates the static noise coefficient of the cabinet top.
2.3.4 Importing Site Information

Importing Site Information
After engineering parameters are configured based on the template, these
engineering parameters can be directly imported to the U-Net. The operation
procedure is as follows:
Step 1 On the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, click to switch to the
Network tab page. Right-click Site and choose Import….
Figure 2-48 Importing site information (1)
Step 2 After a site file is clicked, the Data Import window is displayed.

Figure 2-49 Importing site information (2)
In the Field Mapping worksheet, data in the Source column is obtained from
the source file of the site. Data in the Destination column indicates the names
of site parameters used by the U-Net. If an imported parameter name is
included in the names provided in the Destination column, the Destination
column automatically matches the names. If the name is excluded in the
names provided in the Destination column, IGNORE is displayed in the cell
of the Destination column. You can manually select the value of the cell to
match the fields provided by the U-Net. For example, Site Name of the
imported file is automatically matched to the Site Name field of the U-Net.
The ID name is not a parameter provided by the U-Net. You can manually
match the ID name to the Site ID field of the U-Net. You are advised to export
an empty template and then import NE parameters to the U-Net after these
parameters are edited based on the template. In this way, the efficiency is
improved.
Before importing site information to the U-Net, set the coordinate system (or correctly
import the electrical map) if only the latitude and longitude information is available.
Otherwise, site information fails to be imported.
Update Records indicates whether the existing site data in a project is

replaced. The 1st. Data Row parameter is used to set the line from which the
data is imported. The Field Separator parameter is used to set the separator
of the field.
----End

Viewing Site Information

You can view site information after importing site information to the U-Net.
The operation procedure is as follows:

Network tab page. Right-click Site and choose Open Table.
Figure 2-50 Viewing site information (1)
Figure 2-51 Viewing site information (2)
The data imported to the site must contain the Name field (that is, the site name) and
the site names cannot be repeated. Other fields can be imported as required. The
U-Net provides the default values for fields that are not imported.
Parameters in the site worksheet are as follows:

 Site Name: indicates the name of a site and is the unique identification
of the site. The U-Net automatically enters the default name of each new
site.
 Site ID: indicates the ID of a site. This parameter is customized by
network planning engineers.
 X: indicates the geodetic coordinate X.
 Y: indicates the geodetic coordinate Y.
 Longitude: indicates the longitude coordinate.
 Latitude: indicates the longitude coordinate.
 Comment: indicates the comments of a site.
Setting the Display Mode of a Site

After site information is imported, you can set the display size and display
mode of a site on the Geographic Information System (GIS) map. The
operation procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Right-click Site in the navigation tree and choose Display Setting. The
Display Field window for setting the display mode is displayed. In the
Display Field window, you can set the display mode of a site on the GIS map.
Figure 2-52 Setting the display mode of a site
Figure 2-53 Label Display tab page in the Display Field window

Step 2 On the Label Display tab page, you can set the site parameters displayed on
the map. For example, if Name and Altitude are set to be displayed, name
and altitude of the site are displayed on the map, as shown in Figure 2-54.
Figure 2-54 Effect after labels are set
Step 3 On the Group By Display tab page, you can set the display mode of sites of
each group after these sites are divided into different groups.

Figure 2-55 Default displaying setting of sites and group division setting
Step 4 Select whether Display Type is set to GroupBy.
Figure 2-56 Setting the display mode
The worksheet displays the display mode of the current group. Click the cell
in the first column. The dialog box for setting the display mode is displayed.
In the displayed dialog box, you can set the display mode of the site on the
GIS map.
----End
2.3.5 Importing Transceiver Information

Importing Transceiver Information
After transceiver engineering parameters are configured based on the template,
Step 1 On the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, click to switch to the
Network tab page. Right-click Transceiver and choose Import.
Figure 2-57 Importing transceiver information (1)
If multiple antennas are available under a transceiver, you can configure

antennas with either of the following methods:
Step 2 Switch to the Antenna Config tab page to set multiple antennas, as shown in
Figure 2-58.

Figure 2-58 Antenna setting (1)
Step 3 Right-click Transceiver and choose Antennas > Open Table. Then, set the
antenna information in the displayed antenna worksheet.

Only non-main antennas can be displayed and set in the worksheet. Main antennas are
not displayed in the worksheet. You can modify or switch to the main antennas on the
dialog box for setting the property of the transceiver.
 Transceiver Name: indicates the name of a transceiver.
 Sector ID: indicates the sector ID of an antenna. It is customized by the
user.
 Antenna ID: indicates the ID of an antenna. Together with Transceiver
Name, Antenna ID is the unique identification of a record.
 Dx(m): indicates the offset of the antenna relative to the site that the
antenna belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.
 Dy(m): indicates the offset of the antenna relative to the site that the
antenna belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.
 Antenna: indicates the type of an antenna.
 Height(m): indicates the height of an antenna. The unit is meter.
 Power Ratio: indicates the power ratio. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
 Azimuth: indicates the antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360.
The unit is degree.
 Mechanical Downtilt: indicates the mechanical downtilt of an antenna.
The unit is degree.
 Electrical Downtilt: indicates the electrical downtilt of an antenna. The
unit is degree.
----End
Viewing Transceiver Information

You can view transceiver information after transceiver information is
imported. The operation procedure is as follows:

Network tab page. Right-click Transceiver and choose Open Table.

Figure 2-61 Transceiver setting (1)
By default, all loss parameters and sending/receiving antenna ports are hidden in the
Transceiver worksheet. You can run the Display Columns command to manually
unhide these parameters.
Parameters in the Transceiver worksheet are described as follows:

 Site Name: indicates the name of a site.
 Transceiver Name: indicates the name of a transceiver and is the unique
identification of a transceiver.
 Dx(m): indicates the offset of the antenna relative to the site that the
antenna belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.
 Dy(m): indicates the offset of the antenna relative to the site that the
antenna belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.
 Antenna: indicates the type of an antenna. The default value is
determined based on the antennas in the U-Net. By default, the first
antenna is displayed.
 Height(m): indicates the height of an antenna. The unit is meter.
 Azimuth: indicates the antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360.
The unit is degree.
 Mechanical Downtilt: indicates the mechanical downtilt of an antenna.
The unit is degree.
 Electrical Downtilt: indicates the electrical downtilt of an antenna. The
unit is degree.
 Power Ratio: indicates the power ratio. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
 Comments: indicates the comments of the transceiver.
You can double-click the head of the transceiver worksheet to view the
detailed property of the transceiver in the displayed Transceiver Properties
window.

Figure 2-62 Transceiver setting (2)
Setting the Transceiver Display

The procedures for setting Group By and Display Setting of the transceiver
are similar to those of a site. The procedures are not described in details.
2.3.6 Setting the Frequency Band

Different frequency bands and bandwidths are defined according to
requirements of planning projects. The defined frequency band information is
applied to the Cell worksheet.
The U-Net supports the setting of frequency bands from the worksheet or the
property window. The operation procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Set the frequency band in the worksheet.

Figure 2-63 Frequency band setting (1)

Network tab page. Right-click Transceiver and choose Frequency Band >
Open Table. The frequency band worksheet is displayed, as shown in Figure
2-64.
The number of ARFCNs that can be used for the U-Net depends on the setting of
Start /End Channel Index.
Parameters in the frequency worksheet are described as follows:

 Band Number: indicates a frequency band number.
 Name: indicates the name of a frequency band.
 Bandwidth(MHz): indicates the bandwidth.
 Start Channel Index: indicates the start index of the available ARFCNs
corresponding to a frequency band.

 End Channel Index: indicates the end index of the available ARFCNs
corresponding to a band.
 Excluded Channels: indicates the index of an excluded channel.
 Frequency(DL)(MHz): indicates the downlink ARFCN.
 Frequency(UL)(MHz): indicates the uplink ARFCN.
 ACIR: indicates the adjacent channel signal-to-interference ratio.
In the frequency band worksheet, you can perform the following operations:
 Modify the frequency band property:
Modify the value of the cell in the frequency band worksheet. The setting
of the current cell takes effect after you click any other cell. You can also
press Ctrl+D to change multiple rows of data in a column or press
Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V to copy and paste multiple cells.
 Delete a frequency band:
Click the table head of data in a row and click Delete or right-click the
data and choose Delete to delete the frequency band. The frequency band
quoted by a cell or site template cannot be deleted.
 Add a frequency band.
Click the last empty row of the worksheet and add the property data to be
set. The U-Net provides default values for cells that are not filled with
any data. Then, click other rows of the worksheet to generate new
frequency bands.
Step 2 Set the frequency band from the property window.
In the displayed frequency band worksheet, double-click the head of

frequency band data of a row. The property window corresponding to data of
the row is displayed. You can modify properties of the frequency band in the
property window. Click OK to save the modifications or click Cancel to not
to save the modifications.

----End
2.3.7 Importing Cell Information

Importing Cell Information
After cell engineering parameters are configured based on the template, these

Network tab page. Right-click Transceiver and choose Cells > Import.
Figure 2-66 Importing cell information (1)
The cell data to be imported must contain the following fields:

 Transceiver: indicates the name of a transceiver to which a cell belongs.
 Name: indicates the name of a cell.
If the cell data to be imported does not contain the preceding fields, the cell
data fails to be imported. Other fields can be imported as required. The U-Net
provides the default values for fields that are not imported. Before importing
cell information, site and transceiver information must have been set by
sequence. Note: The frequency band name to be imported to the worksheet
must be consistent with the frequency band name set by the U-Net. In addition,
pay attention to the space character.
Viewing Cell Information

You can view cell information after cell information is imported to the U-Net.


Network tab page. Right-click Transceiver and choose Cells > Open Table.
The cell worksheet is displayed.
Figure 2-67 Cell parameter setting (1)
The cell worksheet contains a lot of parameters. You can set related parameters based
on the required simulation calculation, such as neighboring cell planning, capacity
simulation, and coverage prediction. You can view the related parameter classification
by right-clicking the cell worksheet and choosing Display Columns, as shown in
Figure 2-68.

Figure 2-68 Cell parameter setting (2)
Parameters in the cell worksheet are described as follows:

 Transceiver Name: indicates the name of the transceiver to which the
cell belongs.
 Cell Name: indicates the name of a cell.
 Active: indicates whether to activate the current cell.
 Frequency Band: indicates the frequency band information.
 Channel Index: indicates the channel.
 Reception: indicates the reception equipment.
 RS Power(dB): indicates the power of the reference signal on a
subcarrier. The unit is dBm.
 GCI: indicates the global cell identity of a cell.
 Main Propagation Model: indicates the main propagation model.
 Main Calculation Radius(m): indicates the calculation radius of the
main propagation model.
 Main Resolution(m): indicates the calculation precision of the main
propagation model.
 Extended Propagation Model: indicates the extended propagation
model.
 Extended Calculation Radius(m): indicates the calculation radium of
the extended calculation model.
 Extended Resolution(m): indicates the calculation accuracy of the
extended propagation model.
 MCC: indicates the mobile country code (MCC).
 MNC: indicates the mobile network code (MNC).

 Cell ID: indicates the ID of a cell.

 DlEarfcn: indicates a downlink ARFCN.
 UlEarfcn: indicates a uplink ARFCN.
 Local Cell ID: indicates the internal code of a cell for differentiating the
cell from other cells under the same eNodeB.
 TAC Tracing Area Code: indicates the tracking area code (TAC).
 Max Power(dBm): indicates the maximum transmit power.
 Target Load(DL): indicates the target load on the downlink. The value
ranges from 0 to 1.
 Target Load(UL): indicates the target load on the uplink. The value
ranges from 0 to 1.
 Edge Frequency Style(UL): indicates the method of allocating
frequencies to CEUs on the uplink.
 Edge Frequency Style(DL): indicates the method of allocating
frequencies to CEUs on the downlink.
 ICIC(UL): indicates whether to perform inter-cell interference
coordination (ICIC) on the uplink.
 ICIC(DL): indicates whether to perform inter-cell interference
coordination (ICIC) on the downlink.
 Frequency Selectivity Schedule(UL): indicates whether to enable the
frequency scheduling function on the uplink.
 Frequency Selectivity Schedule(DL): indicates whether to enable the
frequency scheduling function on the downlink.
 Power Control(DL): indicates the power control on the downlink.
 Max Schedule Users(UL): indicates the maximum number of scheduled
subscribers on the uplink.
 Max Schedule Users(DL): indicates the maximum number of scheduled
subscribers on the downlink.
 Control Channel Overhead(UL)(RB): indicates the number of resource
blocks (RBs) on the uplink control channels.
 Control Channel Overhead(DL)(Symbol): indicates the number of
orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) on the downlink
PDCCH.
 Target IoT(UL)(dB): indicates the target Interfere Over Thermal (IOT)
on the uplink.
 PBCH to RS(dB): indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the
power of the reference signal. The unit is dB.
 SCH to Rs(dB): indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the
power of the reference signal. The unit is dB.
 RS SINR Access Threshold(DL)(dB): indicates the SINR access
threshold of the downlink reference signal.
 PB(dB): indicates the index for the offset of A symbols and B symbols of
the RE relative to the RSRE power.
 Schedule Policy: indicates a scheduling policy.
 PA(dB): indicates the index for the offset of A symbols and B symbols of
the RE relative to the RSRE power.

 CCU PA(dB): indicates the offset of the class A signal power received
by users in the cell center on the PDSCH relative to the RS power.
 CEU PA(dB): indicates the offset of the class A signal power received
by users at the cell edge on the PDSCH relative to the RS power.
 Alpha: indicates the path loss compensation coefficient. This is an open
loop power control parameter.
 Po(dBm): It is an open loop power control parameter.
 TTI Bundling: indicates whether TTI Bundling is considered.
 VMIMO: indicates whether the virtual multiple-input multiple-output
(VMIMO) is considered.
 IRC: indicates whether the interference rejection combining (IRC)
function is enabled.
 COMP: indicates whether the macro diversity gain function is enabled
on the base station.
 Channel Relativity: indicates whether channel relativity is considered.
 Transmission Mode: indicates the transmission mode.
 Actual Load(UL): indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value
ranges from 0 to 1.
 Actual Load(DL): indicates the actual load on the downlink. The value
ranges from 0 to 1.
 PCFICH to RS(dB): indicates the offset of the downlink physical
control format indicator channel (PCFICH) power relative to the power
of the reference signal.
 PDCCH to RS(dB): indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power
relative to the power of the reference signal.
 PHICH to RS(dB): indicates the offset of the downlink physical HARQ
indicator channel (PHICH) power relative to the power of the reference
signal.
 Actual IoT(UL)(dB): indicates the actual Interfere Over Thermal (IOT)
on the uplink.
 Priority: indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cell is, the
higher the priority of the cell is.
 CCU IoT(dB): indicates the IoT of users in the cell center.
 CEU IoT(dB): indicates the IoT of users at the cell edge.
 Scene: indicates the scenario of a cell.
 PCI: indicates the physical ID of a cell.
 PCI Block: indicates the ID of a cell cluster.
 High Speed: indicates the speed in a cell.
 Radius(m): indicates the radium of a cell.
 Min Root Sequence Index: indicates the minimal ZC sequence of a cell.
 Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor): indicates the number of PRACH reuse
tiers (depends on the neighboring relationship).
 Reselect Priority: indicates the cell reselection priority.
 Note: The preceding parameters are common parameters in both the
LTE-FDD network system and the LTE-TDD network system. The
LTE-TDD network systems also contain the following parameters:
 Frame Configuration: indicates the ratio of uplink sub-frames to

downlink sub-frames.
 DwPTS-GP-UpPTS: indicates the proportion of special sub-frames.
 Multi-user Beamforming: indicates whether to enable the Multi-user
Beamforming function during the downlink scheduling.
2.3.8 Setting the Traffic Model

Before performing the coverage prediction or capacity simulation, you need to
create traffic data involving in the traffic models, such as service type,
terminal, and mobility. Before performing the capacity simulation, you need
to configure traffic maps and user behaviors and traffic environments related
to traffic maps.
User behaviors, traffic environment, and traffic maps are not required to be set if the
environment-based traffic maps are not prepared or the simulation is not performed.
Configuring the Mobility

On the Data tab page, choose Traffic Parameters > Mobility Types. By
default, the U-Net provides mobility types of 30km/h, 50km/h, 60km/h,
90km/h, Fixed, Pedestrian, and 120km/h. These mobility types correspond
to different mobility rates. For a mobility type, you can define different
mobility rates.
Figure 2-69 Mobility type (1)
Right-click Mobility Types and choose New to create a mobility type. The
Mobility properties dialog box is displayed.
Name: indicates the name of a mobility type. The default value is

MobilityNumber.
Average Speed: indicates the mobility speed. The value ranges from 0 to ∞
with the default value of 0.00. The unit is km/h.
The value can be accurate to two digits after the decimal point.
You can also double-click Mobility Types or right-click Mobility Types and
choose Open Table to add a new mobility type in the window.

Configuring the Service Type

On the Data tab page of the Project Explorer pane, choose Traffic
Parameters > Services > LTE-FDD. By default, the U-Net defines four
service types.
Figure 2-72 Default service types
Create a service type: Right-click Network and choose New. The LTE
Service Properties dialog box is displayed.

Figure 2-73 LTE Service Properties
 Name: indicates the name of a service type.

 Type: indicates the service type, which can be either the voice service or
the data service.
 GBR: indicates the GBR service if GBR is selected.
 AMR Rate: indicates the rate of the voice service. The unit is kbit/s. The
value can be 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, or 12.2.
 Body Loss(dB): indicates the loss due to the human body. The value of
this parameter varies with services. The default value is 3.00.
 Priority: indicates the weighting factor based on the scheduled services.
The weighting factor is assigned depending on the service priority. The
value 1 indicates the lowest priority.
 Activity: indicates the uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter
is required only in voice services and is not required in data services.
 Max Throughput(kbit/s): indicates the maximum uplink/downlink
throughput.
 Min Throughput(kbit/s): indicates the minimal uplink/downlink
throughput.
 Average Throughput(kbit/s): indicates the average uplink/downlink
throughput.
 Transmission Efficiency: indicates the uplink/downlink transmission
rate.
 IBLER(%): indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges
from 0 to 100.

 Offset(kbit/s): indicates the fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is

the length added to an encapsulated packet during the transmission at the
MAC or RLC layer.
After the preceding parameters are set, click OK. You can view the new
service type by choosing Services > LTE-FDD.
To modify an existing service type, you can double-click the service type or
right-click the service type and choose Properties to display the LTE Service
Properties window.
Figure 2-74 Creating a service type
Configuring the Terminal Type

Right-click Traffic Parameters on the Project Explorer pane and choose
Terminals > LTE-FDD. By default, the U-Net provides terminals of two
types.

Figure 2-75 Setting terminals
You can define multiple new terminal types according to the actual situation.
You can choose Traffic Parameters > Terminal > New to define a new
terminal type in the displayed LTE Terminal Properties window.
Figure 2-76 Creating a terminal type
 Name: indicates the name of a terminal type.

 UE Category: indicates the category of a terminal. The terminals are

classified into five categories ranging from 1 to 5.
 UL Peak Throughput(Kbps): indicates the peak throughput in the
uplink direction.
 DL Peak Throughput(Kbps): indicates the peak throughput in the
downlink direction.
 Support UL 64 QAM: indicates that 64 QAM is supported in the uplink
direction.
 Maximum Layer Number: indicates the maximum number of layers.
 Min Tx Power(dBm): indicates the minimal transmit power of a
terminal.
 Max Tx Power(dBm): indicates the maximum transmit power of a
terminal.
 Noise Figure(dB): indicates the noise figure of a terminal.
 Cable Loss(dB): indicates the feeder loss of a terminal.
 UL RS Offset(dB): indicates the reference signal (RS) offset in the
uplink direction.
 RB Number: indicates the number of resource blocks (RBs) supported
by the terminal. This parameter is only applicable to prediction. If this
parameter is selected, the set parameter value is used for calculating
uplink service counters during the prediction. If this parameter is not
selected, the calculated value is used.
 Reception Equipment: indicates the type of the reception equipment for
a terminal. The reception equipment can be set by referring to the
following section ‘Configuring the Demodulation Threshold Table’.
 Gain(dBi): indicates the antenna gain.
 Number of Transmission Antennas: indicates the number of antennas
at the transmitter for a terminal.
 Number of Reception Antennas: indicates the number of antennas at
the receiver for a terminal.
Configuring the Demodulation Threshold Table

You need to configure the demodulation threshold table on the reception
equipment of the terminal if you need to calculate the throughput of
uplink/downlink traffic channels during the prediction or coverage simulation.
Select LTE-FDD under Terminals on the Project Explorer pane. Right-click
Reception Equipment to view the defined reception equipment.

Figure 2-77 Defining the reception equipment
 Name: indicates the name of the reception equipment.

 MCS Table: indicates the MCS bearer table corresponding to the
reception equipment.
The MCS bearer table of the U-Net is the same as that in the protocol. Generally, you
do not need to configure the MCS bearer table. If the MCS bearer table in the protocol
changes, you can view and edit contents of the MCS bearer table with the following
method:
On the Project Explorer pane, right-click LTE-FDD under Services and

choose PUSCH MCS to display the MCS bearer table. Then, you can view
and edit the contents of the MCS bearer table.
Figure 2-78 Displaying the MCS bearer table

Figure 2-79 MCS bearer table

 Index: indicates the index of an MCS.
 Highest Modulation: indicates a modulation scheme, which can be
QPSK, 16QAM, or 64QAM. The default value is QPSK.
 Modulation: indicates a modulation order.
 Coding Rate: indicates the coding rate. The value ranges from 0 to 2.
 Bearer: indicates the bearer efficiency. Bearer efficiency = Coding rate x
Modulation order
After the receiving type is defined in the preceding step, double-click the
boundary on the left of the receiving type (define the left arrow of the
receiving device). The demodulation threshold table of the reception
equipment is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-80.
Figure 2-80 Default UE Reception Equipment Properties

 Mobility: indicates a mobility type.

 MIMO: indicates the MIMO mode.
 IBLER(%): indicates the error block rate.
 Channel Relativity: indicates the channel relativity.
 Transmission Mode: indicates the transmission mode of the cell. This
parameter is available only in the downlink demodulation threshold
table.
 MCS Threshold: indicates the demodulation threshold of data/voice
services. You can double-click a cell and then view the detailed MCS
bearer information in the Demodulation area, as shown in Figure 2-81.
The X axis (in the horizontal direction) indicates the SINR. The Y axis
(in the vertical direction) indicates the spectrum efficiency.
By default, the U-Net has been configured with multiple MIMO configurations and
demodulation threshold tables under mobility conditions. The receding data sources
from Huawei products can satisfy general requirements. The demodulation threshold
table is Huawei confidential and has been incorporated to the U-Net. You do not need
to modify the demodulation threshold table. In addition, you cannot edit the
demodulation threshold table. For special MIMO configurations or mobility speeds,
you can create a new demodulation threshold table after obtaining the mapping
between the SINR and the spectrum efficiency.
Right-click the table and choose Import/Export to import/export the data.

Counters in the table are described as follows:
Figure 2-81 Bear Index/Ec/Nt mapping table
 SINR: indicates the SINR. The unit is dB.

 Spectrum Efficiency: indicates the efficiency of the spectrum.

Configuring User Behaviors

Choose Traffic Parameters > User Profiles on the Project Explorer pane.
By default, the U-Net provides user behaviors of two types, Business User
and Standard User. You can customize various user behaviors based on
different scenarios and different user types.
Figure 2-82 Default types of user behaviors
Right-click User Profiles and choose New to display the User Profile
Properties window, as shown in Figure 2-83.
Figure 2-83 Creating a user behavior (1)

 Name: indicates the name of a user behavior.
 Priority: indicates the priority of a user. The default value is 1.
 Service: indicates a service type.

For voice services:
Calls/hour: indicates the number of calls per hour.
Duration: indicates the average duration of a call. The unit is second.
Network usage = Calls/hour x Duration(s)/3600 = Erlang of a subscriber
For data services:
Calls/hour: indicates the data traffic volume received by a terminal per hour.
Network usage = (Calls/hour x (useful volume(kbytes)/8/call)/Efficiency
factor)/nominal rate(kbit/s)
Volume(UL)(KB): indicates the uplink rate.
Volume(DL)(KB): indicates the downlink rate.
You need to set the preceding table only when the grid map is created based on the
traffic environment, the vector map is created based on the user behavior, and the
clutter map serves as the traffic map.
Click OK to generate the corresponding user type under User Profiles, as

Figure 2-84 Creating a user behavior (2)
You can compare one or more user types. Right-click User Profiles and
choose Compare User Profiles Elements to select the user type to be
compared. Click Compare to display the User Profiles Compare Result
window, as shown in Figure 2-86.

Figure 2-85 Comparing user behaviors (1)
Figure 2-86 Comparing user behaviors (2)
You can change the property of a single user type in the User Profiles
Compare Result window.
Configuring the Traffic Environment

On the Data tab page, choose Traffic Parameters > Environments. By
default, the U-Net provides four traffic environment types, Dense Urban,
Urban, Suburban, and Rural to represent geographical features of the traffic
environments of the four types. You can define the number of subscribers in
traffic environments of each type. In addition, you can customize the traffic
environment based on the actual situation.

Figure 2-87 Environments (1)
Right-click Environments and choose New. The Environment Properties

window is displayed. You can set some basic properties and clutter weighted
parameters, as shown in Figure 2-88.
 Name: indicates the name of an environment type.

 User: indicates the user type.
 Density(Subscribers/km2): indicates the subscriber density, that is, the
number of subscribers per square kilometer. The unit is number/km2.

 Clutter Class: indicates the name of a clutter. It is related to the

imported geographical data.
 Weight: indicates the weight of clutters of each type and is used to
calculate the number of subscribers allocated to clutters of each type.
 % Indoor: indicates the percentage of indoor subscribers in clutters of
each type.
Click OK to generate the corresponding traffic environment, as shown in
Figure 2-90.
You can compare multiple traffic environments. Right-click Environments

and choose Compare Environment Elements. The Environment Compare
window is displayed.

Figure 2-91 Comparing traffic environments (1)
Select the traffic environments to be compared from the Select Environments

check box, and select the comparison items from the Environment Items
check box. Then, click Compare to display the Environment Compare
Result window. You can modify the setting of the environment properties in
the Environment Compare Result window.
Figure 2-92 Comparing traffic environments (2)

2.3.9 Configuring a Traffic Map

Before performing the capacity simulation, you need to configure a traffic
map. In the U-Net, you can create traffic maps of four types, that is, grid maps
based on traffic models, vector maps based on user behaviors, maps based on
the transceiver coverage, and maps based on the user location.
Creating a Traffic Map

On the Data tab page, right-click Traffic Map and choose New Map. The
Select Map Type dialog box is displayed. You can select the required type in
the Select Map Type dialog box.
Figure 2-93 Traffic map
 Create The Map Based on Environment: indicates grid maps based on

the environment.
 Create The Map Based on Vector: indicates maps based on vectors.
 Create The Map Based on Transceiver Coverage: indicates traffic
maps based on the coverage scope of the transceiver.
 Create The Map Based on User Location: indicates traffic maps based
on user locations.
Select traffic maps of a type and click Create map to create a traffic map.
1. Based on Environments
In the Select Map Type dialog box, select Based on Environments and click
Create map. The New Environment Traffic Map Properties dialog box is
displayed.

Figure 2-94 Based on Environments (1)
In the Polygon regions drop-down list, select a polygon that has been created,
and click Add.
Select a type for Environments and click Apply and OK i sequence, as

After you select a polygon, you can also perform other operations, such as
Add Point and Delete Polygon.

After the cursor moves to a polygon, parameters in the tips dialog box include
the name of the polygon, area of the polygon, and boundaries of the polygon.
You can calculate the number of subscribers in the polygon based on the area
of the polygon.
Subscribers = Density (#subscribers/km2) x polygon surface
Subscribers: indicates subscribers that use network resources, including
subscribers that do not attempt to access the network.
In the Environments box, Density is defined as follows:
For CS services, #Users = Density (#subscribers/km2) x polygon surface x
(Calls/h x Duration/3600)
For PS services, #Users = Density (#subscribers/km2) x polygon surface x
(Calls/h x (ULVolume/UL Packet efficiency Factor/UL Nominal Rate of
service (or Bearer) + DL Volume/DL Packet efficiency Factor/DL Nominal
Rate of service (or Bearer)) x 8/3600)
Usually, when you have to create multiple traffic maps, the area of a single map is
independent instead of accumulated. Although the areas may be overlapped, the traffic
maps do not affect each other.
On the GEO tab page, right-click Polygons and choose Statistics. You can
view the area and percentage of topographic forms of each type in the
displayed Clutter Statistics window, as shown in Figure 2-97.

2. Based on Vector
On the Data tab page of the U-Net, choose Traffic Parameters > Traffic
Map. Right-click Traffic Map and choose New Map > Create The Map
Based on Vector.
In the Vector Traffic Map Properties window, set General, Vector, and
Traffic.
Figure 2-98 Vector Traffic Map Properties (1)

Name: indicates the name of a new vector traffic map.
Name: indicates the name of an element in the vector map.

Density: indicates the density. The default value is 0.
There are two buttons, Add and Delete, on the Vector tab page. The buttons
are used to add and delete vectors.

User Profiles: indicates a user type. The default value is Business User.
Mobility: indicates a mobility type. The default value is 30km/h.
Density: indicates the traffic density. The default value is 0.
Add a vector: On the Vector tab page, select the name of the generated vector
traffic map and draw a polygon in the specified area, for example, the faint
red part, as shown in Figure 2-101.
Figure 2-101 Adding a vector

Right-click the new vector traffic map and choose Properties > Vector > Add.
Then, select a vector, as shown in Figure 2-102.
Figure 2-102 Selecting a vector
Delete a vector: On the Vector tab page, select a vector and click Delete to
delete the vector.
3. Based on Transceiver Coverage
On the Data tab page, right-click Traffic Map and choose New Map. The
Select Map Type dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-103.
Figure 2-103 Select Map Type
Select Create The Map Based on Transceiver Coverage and click Create
Map. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-104.

Figure 2-104 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties (General)
On the Transceiver tab page, set related parameters.
Figure 2-105 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties (Transceiver)
 Prediction Group: selects a coverage prediction group. A prediction

group can be available in the Prediction Group drop-down list only
when the prediction groups contains the Best Server study.
 Users Per Service: sets the number of users corresponding to each

service type in each cell.
 Tx_ID: indicates the name of a cell and is determined by the selected
coverage prediction group.
 Service Type (TEFTP, LTEVideo Conferencing, LTEVoIP, LTEWeb
Browsing) (UL): indicates the number of uplink subscribers of a service
type.
 Service Type (LTEFTP, LTEVideo Conferencing, LTEVoIP, LTEWeb
Browsing) (DL): indicates the number of downlink subscribers of a
service type.
Prediction Group: On the Operation tab page, right-click Predictions and choose
Group, the prediction group is displayed. Before creating traffic maps of a certain
type, ensure that a coverage prediction groups has been created.
Parameters on the Traffic tab page are as follows:
Figure 2-106 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties (Traffic)
 Terminals: indicates the subscriber proportion of each terminal type.

The value ranges from 0 to 100. The unit is %.
 Mobility: indicates the subscriber proportion of each terminal type. The
value ranges from 0 to 100. The unit is %.
 Clutters: indicates different clutter types, that is, clutter types obtained
from GIS the maps imported by users.
 ID: indicates the numbers corresponding to different clutter types.
 Weight: indicates the subscriber weight of each clutter and is used to
calculate the number of subscribers to be allocated under each clutter.
 Indoor: indicates the proportion of indoor subscribers under a clutter.

After the preceding settings are complete, click OK to create a traffic map. To
modify parameter settings of a created traffic map, you can double-click the
traffic map or right-click the traffic map and choose Properties. Then, you
can modify parameter settings on the displayed Transceiver Traffic Map
Properties dialog box. Related information about parameter settings is not
described in details for it has been provided before.
4. Based on User Location
Right-click Traffic map and choose New map. In the displayed Select Map
Type dialog box, select Create The Map Based on User Location.
Figure 2-107 Select Map Type
On the User Location tab page, you can manually add the user location
information and can also import the user location data. Click Import. Select a
file and click Open. Set contents of the target column, as shown in Figure
2-108.
Figure 2-108 User Location Traffic Map Properties

Figure 2-109 Importing the user location (1)
The imported result is shown in Figure 2-110.
Figure 2-110 Importing the user location (2)

You can delete and modify the imported data. Parameters of subscriber data
are described as follows:
 X: indicates the X coordinate.
 Y: indicates the Y coordinate.
 Longitude: indicates the longitude.
 Latitude: indicates the latitude.
 Priority: indicates the priority. The value is an integer. The larger the
value, the higher the priority.
 Service: indicates a service type. The service type must have been
defined in the traffic parameters.
 Terminal: indicates a terminal type. The terminal type must have been
 Mobility: indicates a mobility type. The mobility type must have been
 LinkType: indicates the uplink/downlink type.
 IsInDoor: indicates whether a subscriber is an indoor subscriber.
Comparisons of Traffic Maps and Selection of Traffic Maps
Table 2-2 Comparisons of traffic maps and selection of traffic maps
Traffic Map Condition

Creating traffic maps based Set the traffic of each region according to (such
on environments as urban, suburb, and dense urban). It is
applicable to the average distribution scenario
and is not frequently used.
Creating traffic maps based Set the traffic of special geographical
on vectors environment (such as railways, highways, and
gathering place). It is applicable to the average
distribution scenario and is not frequently
used.
Creating traffic maps based Set the service usage of each cell and
on cell coverage corresponding traffic volume or throughput
based on the cell coverage in the actual
network. The coverage prediction result of
each cell must be obtained to create the traffic
map. Generally, a traffic map is created in this
way.
Creating traffic maps based Network planning engineering can customize
on user location subscribers and service properties of
subscribers according to the experience. This
improves the accuracy of traffic data and
therefore provides the accuracy of the
simulation. This is used for comparison tests
and simulation of wireless subscribers with
comparatively fixed locations.
Preparing Hybrid Traffic Maps

Double-click a created traffic map based on the cell coverage. If such traffic
map is unavailable, create a traffic map by referring to 2.3.9 In the displayed
dialog box, On the Transceiver tab page of the Transceiver Traffic Map
Properties window, select a group from the Prediction Group drop-down list,
Figure 2-111 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties
Enter the number of uplink/downlink subscribers for two or more service

types (such as LETFTP and LTEVideo) corresponding to TX_ID, as shown in
Figure 2-112. You can create multiple services such as voice services and data
services in a traffic map.

Figure 2-112 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties
Click OK to complete the preparation of a mixed traffic map.

Error! Unknown document property name.
Error! Unknown document property name. 3 Planning and Simulation
3 Planning and Simulation
3.1 Prediction
Using the U-Net, you can predict the network conditions from multiple
dimensions.
3.1.1 Setting Prediction Parameters

The U-Net predicts the network performance, such as the cell coverage
capability and channel quality, by calculating various indicators.
Set coverage parameters in parameter templates to be imported.
Site parameters are as follows:
Site.xls
Table 3-1 Site parameters
Parameter Description
Name Name of a site. This parameter uniquely identifies

a site.
Longitude Longitudinal coordinate.
Latitude Latitudinal coordinate.
Transceiver parameters are as follows:
Transceiver.xls

Table 3-2 Transceiver parameters
Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver. This parameter uniquely
identifies a transceiver.
Site Name Name of the site to which a transceiver belongs.
Azimuth Azimuth of an antenna. The value of this
parameter ranges from 0 to 360 (unit: degree).
Antenna Type of an antenna.
The default value of this parameter is determined
based on the system antenna configuration. In
most cases, the default value is the type of the
first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt Mechanical downtilt of an antenna (unit: degree).
Electrical Downtilt Electrical downtilt of an antenna (unit: degree).
Height(m) Height of an antenna (unit: meter).
Input Total Loss  If this parameter is selected, the total loss is

entered manually.
 If this parameter is deselected, the total loss is
calculated by the system.
Total Loss(DL) Total downlink loss, including the loss from the
TMA, feeder, and jumper and the miscellaneous
loss.
Total Loss(UL) Total uplink loss, including the loss from the
TMA, feeder, and jumper and the miscellaneous
loss.
Number of Number of transmit antennas in a base station.

Transmission
Antennas
Number of Reception Number of receive antennas in a base station.
Antennas
Number of Number of transmit antenna ports.
Transmission
Antenna Ports
LTE-FDD cell parameters are as follows:

LTE-FDDCell.xls
Table 3-3 LTE-FDD cell parameters

Parameter (* Description Indicator
Indicates a
Mandatory
Parameter)
*Transceiver Name of a transceiver. This
Name parameter uniquely identifies a
transceiver.
*Cell Name Name of a carrier.
*Active Indicates whether to activate the
current carrier.
*MCC Mobile country code (MCC).
*MNC Mobile network code (MNC).
*CI ID of a cell.
*Frequency Information about a frequency
Band band.
*Channel Index Channel index.
*Main Main propagation model.
Propagation
Model
*Main Calculation radius of the main
Radius(m) propagation model.
*Main Calculation precision of the main
Resolution(m) propagation model.
Max Maximum transmit power (unit: Required for
Power(dBm) dBm). calculating all
signal to
interference plus
noise ratios
(SINRs)
*RS Power of the reference signal on a
Power(dBm) subcarrier (unit: dBm).
PDSCH Actual Actual load on the downlink. The Required for
Load(DL) value of this parameter ranges calculating the
from 0 to 1. downlink SINRs
of service and
reference signals


Indicates a
Mandatory
Parameter)
PDSCH Actual Actual load on the uplink. The Required for
Load(UL) value of this parameter ranges calculating the
from 0 to 1. uplink SINRs of
service and
reference signals
Control Channel Number of OFDM symbols on the Required for
Overhead(DL)(S downlink PDCCH. calculating all
ymbol) downlink SINRs
Control Channel Number of RBs on the uplink Required for
Overhead(UL)(R control channel. The value of this calculating all
B) parameter ranges from 1 to N-1. uplink SINRs
The unit is RB. N indicates the
number of RBs on the entire
bandwidth.
Edge Frequency Method of allocating frequencies Required for
Style(UL) to CEUs on the uplink. The calculating all
Reuse3 status (Style1, Style2, or uplink SINRs
Style3) is supported.
Style(DL) to CEUs on the downlink. calculating all
When ICIC(DL) is set to Static downlink SINRs
ICIC, the Reuse3 state (Style1,
Style2, or Style3) is supported.
When ICIC(DL) is set to
Adaptive ICIC, the Reuse3 state
(Style1, Style2, or Style3), Reuse6
state (Style1a, Style1b, Style2a,
Style2b, Style3a, or Style3b),
full-power Reuse1 state
(AllPowerReuse1), and
low-power Reuse1 state
(LowPowerReuse1) are
supported.
When this parameter is set to the
Reuse3 or Reuse6 state, the value
of CCU PA is used as the cell
centers and the value of CEU PA
is used as the cell edges for all
users in the cell. When this
parameter is set to
AllPowerReuse1, the value of PA
is used as the PA values for all
users in the cell. When this
parameter is set to
LowPowerReuse1, the value of

Indicates a
Mandatory
Parameter)
CCU PA value is used as the PA
values for all users in the cell.
ICIC(UL) Indicates whether to perform Depends on
inter-cell interference coordination whether the
(ICIC) on the uplink. ICIC function is
When the ICIC function is enabled for the
disabled, the value of Actual uplink
IoT(UL) specified in the cell
attributes is used across the cell.
When the ICIC function is
enabled, the value of CCU IoT is
used at the cell center and the
value of CEU IoT is used on the
cell edge.
ICIC(DL) Indicates whether to perform ICIC Depends on
on the downlink. whether the
When this parameter is set to ICIC ICIC function is
Off, the value of PA specified in enabled for the
the cell attributes is used across the downlink
cell.
When this parameter is set to
Static ICIC, the ICIC function is
enabled. In this case, the value of
CCU PA is used at the cell center
and the value of CEU PA is used
on the cell edge.
Adaptive ICIC, the ICIC function
can be automatically enabled and
the edge band mode can be
automatically configured. You can
plan edge band modes and then
deliver the band modes without
configuring this parameter for cells
one by one.
PBCH to Offset of the public broadcast Required for
RS(dB) channel (PBCH) power relative to PBCH-related
the reference signal power. The indicators
value of this parameter ranges
from –15 to 15 (unit: dB).
SCH to RS(dB) Offset of the synchronization Required for
channel (SCH) power relative to SCH-related
the reference signal power. The indicators
value of this parameter ranges


Indicates a
Mandatory
Parameter)
PCFICH to Offset of the PCFICH power Required for
RS(dB) relative to the reference signal PCFICH-related
power. The value of this parameter indicators
ranges from –15 to 15 (unit: dB).
PCFICH is short for downlink
physical control format indicator
channel.
PDCCH to Offset of the PDCCH power Required for
RS(dB) relative to the reference signal PDCCH-related
PDCCH is short for downlink
physical downlink control channel.
PHICH to Offset of the PHICH power Required for
RS(dB) relative to the reference signal PHICH-related
PHICH is short for physical
HARQ indicator channel and
HARQ is short for hybrid
automatic repeat request.
Actual Acutal Interfere Over Thermal Required for
IoT(UL)(dB) (IoT) on the uplink. calculating all
uplink SINRs
PA(dB) Offset of the PDSCH RE transmit Required for
power relative to the reference PDSCH-related
signal RE transmit power. PDSCH indicators
is short for physical downlink
shared channel.
The value of this parameter ranges
from –15 to 15. The default value
is –3.
CCU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH Required when
category-A symbols received by the ICIC
cell center users (CCUs) relative to function is
the reference signal power. enabled
is –6.
CEU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH Required when
category-A symbols received by the ICIC
cell edge users (CEUs) relative to function is


Indicates a
Mandatory
Parameter)
the reference signal power. enabled
is –1.77.
*PB(dB) Index for the offset of the power of
category-A and category-B
symbols for data REs relative to
the reference signal RE power.
The value of this parameter can be
0, 1, 2, or 3.
CCU IoT(dB) IoT of a cell center user (CCU). Required when
The value of this parameter ranges the ICIC
from –100 to 100. The default function is
value is 12.5. enabled
CEU IoT(dB) IoT of a cell edge user (CEU). Required when

The value of this parameter ranges the ICIC
from –100 to 100. The default function is
value is 10.5. enabled
Alpha Open-loop power control Required for all

parameter indicating the indicators
coefficient for pass loss related to uplink
compensation in a cell. reference and
service signals
Po(dBm) Power parameter for open-loop Required for all
power control. indicators
related to uplink
service and
reference signals
and uplink
control
PUCCH IRC Indicates whether to enable the Required for
PUCCH interference rejection calculating the
combining (IRC) function. SINR of the
For the PUCCH, the PUCCH IRC PUCCH
function is enabled when colored
interference is severe. This reduces
the interference power of
combined signals and improves
uplink gains.
This parameter is not selected by
default.
PRACH IRC Indicates whether to enable the Required for


Indicates a
Mandatory
Parameter)
PRACH interference rejection calculating the
For the PRACH, the PRACH IRC PRACH
uplink gains.
default.
PUSCH IRC Indicates whether to enable the Required for
PUSCH interference rejection calculating the
For the PUSCH, the PUSCH IRC PUSCH
uplink gains.
default.
COMP Indicates whether to enable the Required for
coordinated multi-point calculating the
transmission/reception technology SINR of the
(CoMP) function. PUSCH
You can enable the CoMP
function for the uplink in a base
station, thereby improving the cell
edge capacity and the average cell
throughput. This parameter is not
selected by default.
Channel Indicates whether to consider the Required for all
Relativity channel correlation. throughput-relat
This parameter is not selected by ed indicators
default.
Transmission Transmission mode. Required for all
Mode For details about the value of this throughput-relat
parameter, see Table 3-5. ed indicators
LTE-TDD cell parameters are as follows:

LTE-TDDCell.xls
Table 3-4 LTE-TDD cell parameters

Indicates a
Mandatory
Parameter)
Transceiver Name of a transceiver. This
*Name parameter uniquely identifies a
transceiver.
current carrier.
*MCC Mobile country code (MCC).
*MNC Mobile network code (MNC).
*CI ID of a cell.
*Frequency Information about a frequency
Band band.
*Main Main propagation model.
Propagation
Model
*Main Calculation radius of the main
Radius(m) propagation model.
*Main Calculation precision of the main
Resolution(m) propagation model.
*Max Maximum transmit power (unit:
Power(dBm) dBm).
*RS Power of the reference signal on a
Power(dBm) subcarrier (unit: dBm).
PDSCH Actual Actual load on the downlink. The Required for
Load(DL) value of this parameter ranges calculating the
from 0 to 1. downlink SINRs
of service and
reference signals
PDSCH Actual Actual load on the uplink. The Required for
Load(UL) value of this parameter ranges calculating the
from 0 to 1. uplink SINRs of
service and
reference signals

Indicates a
Mandatory
Parameter)
Control Channel Number of OFDM symbols on the Required for
Overhead(DL)(S downlink PDCCH. calculating all
ymbol) downlink SINRs
Control Channel Number of RBs on the uplink Required for
Overhead(UL)(R control channel. The value of calculating all
B) this parameter ranges from 1 to uplink SINRs
N-1. The unit is RB. N indicates
the number of RBs on the entire
bandwidth.
Style(UL) to CEUs on the uplink. The calculating all
Reuse3 status (Style1, Style2, or uplink SINRs
Style3) is supported.
Style(DL) to CEUs on the downlink. calculating all
 When ICIC(DL) is set to Static downlink SINRs
 When ICIC(DL) is set to
Adaptive ICIC, the Reuse3
state (Style1, Style2, or Style3),
Reuse6 state (Style1a, Style1b,
Style2a, Style2b, Style3a, or
Style3b), full-power Reuse1
state (AllPowerReuse1), and
(LowPowerReuse1) are
supported.
 When this parameter is set to the
Reuse3 or Reuse6 state, the
value of CCU PA is used as the
cell centers and the value of
CEU PA is used as the cell
edges for all users in the cell.
AllPowerReuse1, the value of
PA is used as the PA values for
all users in the cell. When this
parameter is set to
LowPowerReuse1, the value of
values for all users in the cell.
ICIC(UL) Indicates whether to perform ICIC Depends on
on the downlink. whether the ICIC
 When the ICIC function is function is

Indicates a
Mandatory
Parameter)
disabled, the value of Actual enabled for the
IoT(UL) specified in the cell uplink
attributes is used across the cell.
 When the ICIC function is
enabled, the value of CCU IoT
is used at the cell center and the
value of CEU IoT is used on the
cell edge.
ICIC(DL) Indicates whether to perform ICIC Depends on
on the downlink. whether the ICIC
 When this parameter is set to function is
ICIC Off, the value of PA enabled for the
specified in the cell attributes is downlink
used across the cell.
 When this parameter is set to
Static ICIC, the ICIC function
is enabled. In this case, the value
of CCU PA is used at the cell
center and the value of CEU PA
is used on the cell edge.
 When this parameter is set to
Adaptive ICIC, the ICIC
function can be automatically
enabled and the edge band mode
can be automatically configured.
You can plan edge band modes
and then deliver the band modes
without configuring this
parameter for cells one by one.
PBCH to Offset of the PBCH power relative Required for
RS(dB) to the reference signal power. The PBCH-related
value of this parameter ranges indicators
SCH to RS(dB) Offset of the SCH power relative Required for
to the reference signal power. The SCH-related
value of this parameter ranges indicators
PCFICH to Offset of the PCFICH power Required for
RS(dB) relative to the reference signal PCFICH-related
PDCCH to Offset of the PDCCH power Required for
RS(dB) relative to the reference signal PDCCH-related


Indicates a
Mandatory
Parameter)
PHICH to Offset of the PHICH power Required for
RS(dB) relative to the reference signal PHICH-related
Actual Acutal Interfere Over Thermal Required for
IoT(UL)(dB) (IoT) on the uplink. calculating all
uplink SINRs
PA(dB) Offset of the PDSCH RE transmit Required for
power relative to the reference PDSCH-related
signal RE transmit power. indicators
from -15 to 15. The default value
is -3.
CCU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH Required when
category-A symbols received by the ICIC function
CCUs relative to the reference is enabled
signal power.
is -6.
CEU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH Required when
category-A symbols received by the ICIC function
CEUs relative to the reference is enabled
signal power.
is -1.77.
*PB(dB) Index for the offset of the power of
category-A and category-B
symbols for data REs relative to
the reference signal RE power.
The value of this parameter can be
0, 1, 2, or 3.
CCU IoT(dB) IoT of a cell center user (CCU). Required when
The value of this parameter ranges the ICIC function
from -100 to 100. The default is enabled
value is 12.5.
CEU IoT(dB) IoT of a cell edge user (CEU). Required when
The value of this parameter ranges the ICIC function
from -100 to 100. The default is enabled


Indicates a
Mandatory
Parameter)
value is 10.5.
Alpha Open-loop power control Required for all
parameter indicating the indicators related
coefficient for pass loss to uplink reference
compensation in a cell. and service
signals
Po(dBm) Power parameter for open-loop Required for all
power control. indicators related
to uplink service
and reference
signals and uplink
control
PUCCH IRC Indicates whether to enable the Required for
For the PUCCH, the PUCCH IRC PUCCH
uplink gains.
default.
PRACH IRC Indicates whether to enable the Required for
For the PRACH, the PRACH IRC PRACH
uplink gains.
default.
PUSCH IRC Indicates whether to enable the Required for all
PUSCH interference rejection counters related to
combining (IRC) function. the SINR of the
For the PUSCH, the PUSCH IRC PUSCH
uplink gains.

Indicates a
Mandatory
Parameter)
default.
COMP Indicates whether to enable the Required for all
coordinated multi-point counters related to
transmission/reception technology the SINR of the
(CoMP) function. PUSCH
You can enable the CoMP
function for the uplink in a base
station, thereby improving the cell
edge capacity and the average cell
throughput.This parameter is not
Channel Indicates whether to consider the Required for all
Relativity channel correlation. throughput-related
This parameter is not selected by indicators
default.
Transmission Transmission mode. Required for all
Mode For details about the value of this throughput-related
parameter, see Table 3-5. indicators
*DwPTS-GP-Up Special subframe ratio.

PTS
*Frame Uplink and downlink subframe
Configuration configuration.
 Including the ratios of uplink,
downlink, and special
subframes.
 Value example:
DSUUUDSUUU.
D indicates a downlink subframe,
S indicates a special subframe, and
U indicates an uplink subframe.
Table 3-5 Values of the Transmission Mode parameter
Value Description
TM1 Single antenna port. This value is used for
the eNodeB 1T configuration.
TM2 Open-loop transmit diversity (OL-TD).
This value is used for the eNodeB 2T2R,
4T2R, 4T4R, or 8T8R configuration.

Value Description
TM3 Open-loop spatial multiplexing (OL-SM).
4T2R, or 4T4R configuration.
TM4 Closed-loop spatial multiplexing (CL-SM).
TM6 Closed-loop transmit diversity (CL-TD).
TM7 Single-stream beamforming.
This transmission mode is unavailable for
LTE-FDD.
TM8 Single- and dual-stream beamforming.
LTE-FDD.
TM2/3 Open-loop adaptation (between TM2 and
TM3).
TM4/6 Closed-loop adaptation (between TM4 and
TM6).
TM2/3/4/6 Open- and closed-loop adaptation (between
TM2, TM3, TM4, and TM6).
TM2/3/7 BF/MIMO adaptation. For UEs that support
3GPP Release 8 specifications but do not
support uplink transmit antenna selection,
the transmission mode can be switched
between TM2, TM3, and TM7 for
adaptation.
LTE-FDD.
TM2/3/8 BF/MIMO adaptation. For UEs that support
3GPP Release 9 specifications but do not
support uplink transmit antenna selection,
the transmission mode can be switched
between TM2, TM3, and TM8 for
adaptation.
LTE-FDD.
3.1.2 Setting Prediction Global Parameters

On the Operation tab page of the Project Explorer pane, right-click
Predictions and choose Properties.
Figure 3-1 Prediction properties (1)
The Predictions Properties window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2.
Default resolution: predicts the default accuracy of the calculation. After

Default resolution is set, the prediction accuracy of all prediction groups is
the value of Default resolution. Generally, the prediction accuracy is the
same as the accuracy of the map and that of the cell transmission accuracy.
The setting of Default resolution has great impact on the prediction
calculation. The value of Default resolution affects not only the reliability of
the prediction result, but also the time of prediction calculation. The higher

the accuracy, the longer the calculation time. You can modify the calculation
accuracy as required.
The settings in the Receiver window are as follows:
Height: indicates the distance between the terminal and the ground during the
simulation. The recommended height is 1.5 m.
3.1.3 Creating a Prediction Group

On the Operation tab page of the Project Explorer pane, right-click
Predictions and choose New.
If you select New Single Cell Prediction, a prediction groups of a single cell is
created. By default, other cells are regarded as unactivated. You can select New
Single Cell Prediction to effectively view the prediction results of each cell in
batches, ensuring that there is no cell interference.

Figure 3-4 Creating a prediction group (1)
The New Prediction Group window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-5.
The prediction studies include Coverage by Signal Level(DL), Coverage By

C/(I+N) Level(DL), Coverage by Signal Level(UL), Coverage By C/(I+N)
Level(UL), Coverage By MCS(DL), Coverage By Throughput(DL),

Coverage By MCS(UL), and Coverage By Throughput(UL). When
creating a new prediction group, you select the prediction studies as required.
For LTE-FDD network systems, there are 40 prediction studies; for LTE-TDD
network systems, there are 25 prediction studies.
By default, only common prediction studies are displayed. To display studies that are
not frequently used, right-click the corresponding study node and choose More
Coverage, as shown in Figure 3-6.
To hide studies that are not frequently used, click Clear More.

 Group Name: indicates the name of a prediction group.

 Calculate Now: indicates whether to calculate each prediction study
immediately. If the parameter is selected, the prediction study is
calculated immediately. If the parameter is not selected, the prediction
group is only created.
Click Next. A window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-8.

Parameters on the General tab page are as follows:

 Name: indicates the name of a new prediction group.
 Resolution: indicates the calculation precision. The parameter value can
be the same as the value of Default resolution or can be changed
according to prediction requirements.
 Intra-Frequency Handover(dB): indicates the handover threshold of
intra-frequency cells. This parameter is effective when predicting the
Handover Area and Overlapping Zones studies.
 Inter-Frequency Handover(dB): indicates the handover threshold of
inter-frequency cells. This parameter is effective when predicting the
Handover Area and Overlapping Zones studies.
 Polygon: indicates the area calculated in prediction. You can draw a
polygon in the prediction area in the Map window.
 Neighbour PDSCH Load: indicates the interference on the neighbor
PDSCH.
 Neighbour PDSCH Load: indicates the interference on the neighbor
PDCCH.
 With Shadow: indicates whether shadow fading is considered in the
calculation. If this parameter is selected, shadow fading is calculated
based on the probability of cell edge coverage set by Cell Edge Coverage
Probability. If this parameter is not selected, shadow fading is not

considered.
The shadow fading margin is calculated based on the probability of cell edge coverage
and the standard deviation of the shadow fading. The standard deviation of the
shadow fading is set in the parameter worksheet by choosing Map > clutter >
parameter management on the GEO tab page.
 Indoor Coverage: indicates whether penetration loss is considered in the
calculation. If this parameter is selected, penetration loss of each clutter
type is considered in the calculation.
Parameters on the Condition tab page are shown in Figure 3-9.
 Signal Level(DL)(dBm): indicates the receive threshold of the downlink

reference signal. If the signal strength of a grid is beyond the set scope,
prediction studies in this grid are not calculated during the prediction and
appear blank in the prediction map.
 Signal Level(UL)(dBm): indicates the receive threshold of the uplink
reference signal. If the signal strength of a grid is beyond the set scope,
prediction studies in this grid are not calculated during the prediction and
appear blank in the prediction map.
 Interferer Reception Threshold(dBm): indicates the interference
threshold. If the interference of neighboring cells on the main service cell
is smaller than the value of this parameter, it is considered that
neighboring cells have no interference on the main service cell.
 Terminal: indicates a terminal type. You can select a terminal type from
the Terminal drop-down list. Also, you can set a terminal type by
choosing Traffic Parameter > Terminal on the Data tab page.
 Service: indicates a service type. You can select a service type from the
Service drop-down list. Also, you can set a service type by choosing
Traffic Parameter > Service on the Data tab page.
 Mobility: indicates a mobility type. You can select a mobility type from
the Mobility drop-down list. Also, you can set a mobility type by
choosing Traffic Parameter > Mobility on the Data tab page.
Parameters on the Advanced tab page are as shown in Figure 3-10.

Parameters on the Advanced tab page are used to filter frequency bands. The
filtered frequency bands do not participate in the calculation of Best Server
studies but participate in the calculation of interference. For example, you
select band 2110 and set Channel Index to 0. Therefore, the coverage
prediction only calculates cells at band 2110 and with the Channel Index of 0.
Other cells do not serve as source cells. Interference of these cells can be
taken into consideration.
 Frequency Name: indicates the name of a frequency band.
 Channel Index: indicates the ARFCN for the prediction.
After these parameters are set, click OK. A new prediction group is created.
You can view the new prediction group from the Predictions drop-down list
on the Operation tab page.
3.1.4 Running the Prediction

After a prediction group is created, you can formally run the calculation. The
operating procedure for invoking the calculation is as follow:
Calculating a Single Prediction Group

Step 1 When creating a new prediction group, select Calculate Now. After the
prediction group is created, the calculation is automatically started.
Step 2 Right-click a prediction group under Predictions and choose Calculate to
start the calculation.

Figure 3-12 Calculating a single prediction group
If only some studies in the current prediction group need to be calculated, you can
lock the studies that need not to be calculated, as shown in Figure 3-13.

Figure 3-13 Locking prediction studies
Also, you can unlock the locked studies.
Figure 3-14 Unlocking prediction studies
If all studies in the current prediction group are locked, calculation of the
prediction group cannot be performed.

Figure 3-15 Failing to perform the calculation
----End
Calculating Multiple Prediction Groups

Right-click Predictions and choose Calculate. All prediction groups under
Predictions are calculated by sequence.

Figure 3-16 Calculating multiple prediction groups
If only some prediction groups need to be calculated, you can lock all studies in the
prediction groups that need not to be calculated, as shown in Figure 3-17.

Figure 3-17 Locking prediction studies
Also, you can unlock the locked prediction groups.

Figure 3-18 Unlocking prediction studies
If all prediction groups are locked, calculation of the prediction groups cannot
be performed.

Figure 3-19 Failing to perform the calculation
During the calculation, the current progress is displayed on the Task tab page
in the Event Viewer window of the U-Net.
Figure 3-20 Calculation progress
The U-Net automatically starts the calculation of the path loss before the prediction
calculation.
During the prediction calculation, you can right-click Predictions and choose
Stop or right-click a prediction group and choose Stop to stop the calculation
of the prediction group.

Figure 3-21 Stopping the prediction calculation (1)

Figure 3-22 Stopping the prediction calculation (2)
3.1.5 Viewing the Prediction Result

The U-Net provides several modes for outputting each prediction study, such
as prediction map, statistics map, statistics table, and data export of Bin point.
Outputting a Prediction Map

During the actual project planning, it is the most commonly-used and visible
way to display the prediction results in a prediction map. The following figure
is an example of a prediction map.

Figure 3-23 Example of a prediction map
Step 1 Set the legend. Right-click a prediction study such as DL RSRP, as shown in
Figure 3-24.
Figure 3-24 Setting the legend (1)
Choose Properties. In the displayed Study Properties window, click Display.

The Display tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-25.

On the Display tab page, you can change the color and range of the legend on
the prediction map. You can directly click each range to change its color and
scope. Also, you can click Actions to perform operations such as Insert
Before, Insert After, Delete, Export Legend, Import Legend, and Shading.
 Transparency: indicates the transparency. The greater the parameter
value, the higher the transparency. The setting of the transparency is used
to display the superimposed comparison of prediction results of several
studies.
 Add to legend: If Add to legend is selected, the legend of prediction is
displayed in the Legend window.
 Show Statistic: If Show Statistic is selected, the statistics on the
selected ranges are displayed in the Legend window.
By default, the Legend window is not displayed. You can choose Edit > Legend to
display the Legend window.
 Actions: The Actions drop-down menu is as follows:

− Insert Before: indicates that a new range is inserted before the

specified range.
− Insert After: indicates that a new range is inserted after the specified
range.
− Delete: indicates that the specified range is deleted.
− Export Legend: indicates that the current range setting is exported.
The current range setting can be applied to the legend range of the
same study in other prediction groups.
− Import Legend: indicates that the existing range setting is imported.
− Shading: indicates the automatic range. You can set the start break
and end break of the range.
Step 2 Export MIF/JPG figures in batches.

Right-click a prediction group and choose Export Results.

Figure 3-28 Exporting MIF/JPG figures in batches (1)

Figure 3-29 Exporting MIF/JPG figures in batches (2)
Select the studies to be exported, select MIF or JPG, and click Export. Then,
the MIF/JPG figures of multiple studies can be exported in batches.
----End
Exporting a Statistics Figure

The statistics about an indicator can be displayed in a CDF or PDF figure,
which is achieved by choosing Statistics(CDF) or Statistics(PDF) from the
shortcut menu.
 Statistics of a single study
Right-click a prediction study, such as DL RS SINR.

Figure 3-30 Items in the shortcut menu for the statistics about a single an
indicator
− If you choose Statistics(CDF) from the shortcut menu, the CDF

statistics figure shown in Figure 3-31 is displayed.
Figure 3-31 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a counter (1)

Figure 3-32 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of an indicator (2)
− If you choose Statistics(PDF) from the shortcut menu, the PDF

statistics figure shown in Figure 3-33 is displayed.
Figure 3-33 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of an indicator (1)

Figure 3-34 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of an indicator (2)
 Statistics of studies in a prediction group

Right-click a prediction group and choose Statistics(CDF) or
Statistics(CDF) from the shortcut menu.

Figure 3-35 Items in the shortcut menu for the indicator statistics about a
prediction group
− If you choose Statistics(CDF) from the shortcut menu, the CDF

statistics figure for each indicator in the prediction group is displayed,

Figure 3-36 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a prediction group (1)
Figure 3-37 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a prediction group (2)

− If you choose Statistics(PDF) from the shortcut menu, the PDF

statistics figure for each indicator in the prediction group is displayed,
Figure 3-38 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of a prediction group (1)

Figure 3-39 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of a prediction group (2)
 Study: indicates the prediction studies. You can choose different studies
to view the statistics figures.
 Zone: You can set this parameter to the area of the prediction group or a
hotspot.
 Statistics Area: Statistics Area can be set to either Coverage Area or
Calculate Area. Coverage Area indicates that the statistics is based on
the coverage area and Calculate Area indicates that the statistics is
based on the calculation area.
 Figure Style: When you choose Statistics(CDF), you can set this
parameter to CDF (to view a CDF figure) or Inverse CDF (to view a
reversed CDF figure). When you choose Statistics(PDF), this parameter
is unavailable.
When statistics on indicators related to the uplink throughput and downlink

throughput are collected, the statistics parameters are changed as follows:

Figure 3-40 Selecting indicators related to the uplink throughput and downlink
throughput
Figure 3-41 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a selected uplink or downlink
indicator
 Show Average And Edge Value: indicates whether to display the

average value and the edge throughput.
 Edge Radio (%): sets the edge throughput.
Exporting a Statistics Table

 Statistics of a single study
Right-click a prediction study, such as DL RS SINR.

Figure 3-42 Exporting a statistics table (1)
Choose Generate Report. A statistics table is generated, as shown in Figure

3-43. Based on the set ranges, the U-Net exports the percentage, cumulative
percentage of each range and the proportion of each clutter class.
 Statistics of a single prediction group

Right-click a prediction group under Predictions.

Choose Export Results. A window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-45.

For studies whose statistics data is to be exported, select Statistics. Also, you
can select the statistics items and click Export to export the statistics data.
 Statistics of multiple studies
Right-click Predictions.

Choose Generate Report. A statistics table is generated, as shown in Figure

3-47. Based on the set ranges, the U-Net exports the accumulated percentage
of each range and the proportion of each clutter class.
Exporting Bin Data

Right-click a prediction study, such as DL RSRP.
Figure 3-48 Exporting bin data
Choose Export BIN By. The simulation results of each bin are exported.
The simulation results can be exported in any of the three modes:

Polygon: indicates that the prediction results are exported by the selected
area.
Figure 3-49 Exporting data by area
DL RSRP: indicates that the prediction results are exported by the selected
RSRP range segment, as shown in Figure 3-50.

Figure 3-50 Exporting data by DL RSRP
Top Signal Level: indicates that the top N levels that satisfy the threshold of
Min Signal Level on each bin are exported. The exported data is used to
generate the data of the feature database, as shown in Figure 3-51.
Figure 3-51 Exporting data by top signal level
3.1.6 Adjusting Parameters Based on Prediction Results

During the routine planning, the RSRP or SINR coverage effect may be poor.
In this case, you can adjust some parameters to improve the coverage effect.
Adjusting RSRP Parameters

Step 1 Adjust the configurations of the propagation model and change the parameters
and formula coefficient. If there is drive test data, you are advised to use the
propagation model after the model is calibrated using the drive test data.
Step 2 Decrease the standard derivation of shading fading of clutter parameters.

Step 3 Check whether the setting of the antenna height is correct. Generally, the
antenna height is the relative height compared to the ground surface.
Step 4 Increase the power of pilot signals based on different scenarios.
----End
Adjusting SINR Parameters

Step 1 Decrease the value of Actual Load in cell parameters to decrease the load of
interference cell.
Step 2 Decrease the derivation value of shading fading C/(I+N) to be 2 dB to 4 dB
smaller than the standard derivation value.
----End
3.1.7 Comparing Prediction Results in Different

Scenarios
After adjusting parameters, you can copy the existing prediction groups,
calculate the same studies, and compare results before and after parameters
are adjusted to check the quality of the parameter adjustment.
Copying the Prediction Group

Right-click an existing prediction group and choose Duplicate.
Figure 3-52 Copying the prediction group
Running the Prediction Group

For detailed operations, see section 3.1.4.

Comparing Prediction Results

Step 1 Compare CDF figures.
Select the prediction groups and corresponding studies to be compared.
Right-click Predictions and choose Compare.
Figure 3-53 Comparing prediction results (1)

You can view the comparison results of multiple prediction groups by

choosing different studies from the drop-down list.
You can choose Coverage Area or Calculate Area for comparison. Coverage
Area indicates the coverage area of the cell and Calculate Area indicates the
polygon calculation area selected from the prediction group. If the prediction
group predicts the full map, Coverage Area equals to Calculate Area.
Step 2 Compare statistics reports.
Select the prediction groups and corresponding studies to be compared.
Right-click Predictions and choose Generate Report.

----End
3.1.8 Exporting Prediction Results

For details, see 3.1.5.
3.1.9 Printing Prediction Results

The U-Net provides two methods of printing rendering figures of prediction
results.
3.1.10 Method 1
Print prediction results of a single study or multiple studies in a prediction
group in batches. The operation procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Right-click a prediction group and choose Batch Print, as shown in Figure
3-57.

Figure 3-57 Printing PDF figures in batches (1)

Figure 3-58 Printing PDF figures in batches (2)
Step 2 Select the area to be printed (entire network or major areas marked by the
polygon), select required studies, and click Print to print rendering figures of
all selected studies. For details about printing settings, see section 4.4 "Print."
The rendering figures of studies can be printed only for studies that are selected.
----End
Method 2
Print prediction results of a single study. The operation procedure is as
follows:
Select nodes of study trees to be printed (that is, deselect other studies), and
then print the print results by referring to the operation procedures described
in section 4.4 "Print."
3.1.11 Modifying a Prediction Group

For an existing prediction group, you can modify the properties of a
prediction group or add/delete studies for calculation as required before
performing the prediction calculation.
Modifying the Properties of a Prediction Group

Right-click a prediction group to be modified and choose Properties. Then,
modify the properties of the prediction group on the displayed Group
Properties window.

Figure 3-59 Modifying the properties of a prediction group (1)

Figure 3-60 Modifying the properties of a prediction group (2)
For a prediction group that has been successfully calculated, the lock status of studies
in the prediction group will be changed to unlocked after the properties are modified.
Adding/Deleting Prediction Studies

Right-click a prediction group to be changed and choose Edit Studies, as

Figure 3-61 Adding/deleting prediction studies (1)

Figure 3-62 Adding/deleting prediction studies (2)
Select or deselect studies in the Edit Studies window as required and click
OK to make the modifications effective.
3.1.12 Deleting a Prediction Group

Deleting the Specified Prediction Group
Right-click a prediction group to be deleted and choose Delete to delete the
prediction group.

Figure 3-63 Deleting the selected prediction group
Deleting All Single-Cell Prediction Groups

Right-click Predictions and choose Delete Single Cell Prediction. All
single-cell prediction groups will be deleted.

Figure 3-64 Deleting all single cell prediction groups
3.2 Neighboring Cell Planning

The neighboring UMTS cell planning can be performed in three modes,
topology, prediction, and prediction + topology. In the scenario of creating a
network where maps are available, the prediction + topology mode is
recommended for the neighboring cell planning.
3.2.1 Planning Data

Before neighboring cell planning, you need to import engineering parameters,
which are used as entities for neighboring cell planning. If neighboring cell
planning is performed in prediction or prediction + topology mode, you need
to import the e-map corresponding to the engineering parameters.

Data Usage Requirement

E-map An e-map is the basis for The U-Net supports the import
coverage neighboring cell of e-maps in Plannet, *.TAB,
planning. and *.mif formats.
The layers to be imported are
as follows:
 Clutter map (mandatory)
 Altitude map (mandatory)
 Vector map (optional)
 Building height map
(mandatory if the Vocanno
propagation model is used)
Engineering Engineering parameters The U-Net supports the import
parameters include information, such of engineering parameters in
as the locations, types, TXT, CSV, XLS, and XLSX
frequencies, frequency formats.
bands, and cell The engineering parameters
parameters of all contain the following
candidate sites, and information:
therefore are the basic
 Site information: such as
data for neighboring cell
planning. the site name and location
(latitude and longitude)
 Antenna information: such
as the antenna azimuth
 Cell information: such as
the frequency band and
propagation model
For details about the scenarios and how to plan data, see GSM Technology
Guide provided by the Solutuons Design Department.
Set coverage parameters in parameter templates to be imported.
For details about the settings of site parameters, see Table 3-1.
For details about the settings of transceiver parameters, see Table 3-2.
The settings of LTE-FDD cell parameters are as follows:
LTE-FDDCell.xls

Table 3-6 Settings of LTE-FDD cell parameters
Parameter (* Indicates a Description

Mandatory Parameter)
*Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver. This

parameter uniquely identifies a
transceiver.
current carrier.
*Frequency Band Information about a frequency
band.
*Status Status of a cell compared with an
existing neighboring cell. For
details, see Figure 3-91.
*Scene Scenario of a cell.
RS Power(dBm) Power of the reference signal on a
subcarrier (unit: dBm).
The settings of LTE-TDD cell parameters are the same as those of LTE-FDD
cell parameters.
3.2.2 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning of a New

Network
Setting Planning Parameters
On the Operation tab page on the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net,
right-click LTE and choose Neighbor Automatic Allocation to start the
neighboring cell planning, as shown in Figure 3-65.

Figure 3-65 Starting the neighboring cell planning
After the neighboring cell planning is started, the LTE Neighbor Plan
Setting window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-66.
Figure 3-66 Setting neighboring cell planning parameters (1)


 Methods Select area
− Topology: The topology mode is selected for neighboring cell
planning. The distance and angle are considered and the network
planning is quick. The downtilt of the antenna and geographical
environment are not considered. In this case, the neighboring cell
planning is performed in an ideal environment without considering
any other factors.
− Prediction: The coverage prediction mode is selected for neighboring
cell planning. According to the coverage prediction algorithm, the
propagation model and engineering parameters are fully considered
and the number of neighboring cells of border cells is controllable.
The number of border cells is sensitive to changes of parameters. As a
result, the parameters must be adjusted to obtain a better planning
result. The planning speed is slower than that of the topology mode.
The coverage prediction is not required here.

− Topology + Prediction: The topology + prediction mode is selected
for neighboring cell planning. When the number of neighboring cells
planned in prediction mode does not exceed the threshold,
neighboring cells planned in topology mode can be added to avoid
that some neighboring cells are not configured and obtain a better
planning result of central cells. The planning speed is slower than that
of the topology mode and that of the prediction mode.
 General Parameter area
− Max Neighbor Distance(km): indicates the maximum neighboring
cell distance.
− Planning Neighbor based on existed Neighbor: If this parameter is
selected, the existing neighboring relationships are not deleted. This
parameter is used to separate network creation from capacity
expansion scenarios.
− Force Co-Site As Neighbor: If this parameter is selected, co-site
cells are forcibly configured as neighboring cells.
− Co-Site Distance(m): indicates the distance tolerance allowed by
co-site cells. This parameter is set due to possible errors of
engineering parameters on the live network.
− Force Using Co-Site Existing Neighbor: indicates whether to use
the existing 2G/3G neighboring relationships as reference for
planning the neighboring cell relationships on LTE networks.
− Azimuth Difference(°): indicates the azimuth difference between the
cells to be planned and the cells used for reference.
 Common Prediction Parameter area: When the neighboring cell
planning mode is prediction or prediction + topology, prediction
parameters can be set in this area.
− Handover Area Percent(%): indicates the handover area proportion.
The source cell and target cell can be planned as neighboring cells
only when the handover area of the source cell and the target cell is
greater than or equal to the entered parameter value.

− Compute shadowing: indicates whether shadow fading margin is

considered in the calculation.
− Cell Edge Coverage Probability(%): indicates the probability of the
cell edge coverage.
− Compute Indoor Loss: If this parameter is selected, the penetration
loss is considered in the calculation.
 Intra-Technology Prediction Parameter area: When the neighboring
cell planning mode is prediction or prediction + topology, parameters
related to the calculation of intra-RAT handover areas are set in this area.
− Min Signal Level(dBm): indicates the minimal signal receive level.
− Handover Threshold(dB): indicates the handover area threshold.
The handover threshold refers to the threshold at which the UE
handover may occur. The value of this parameter is usually set based
on experience and the default value is 6.
 Area: indicates the planning area. You can draw multiple planning areas
on the interface to perform the simulation planning. You can select any
required areas for neighboring cell planning. By default, the full map is
planned. You can filter all cells where neighboring cells are not required
in the selected planning area, as shown in Figure 3-67. If the Selected
property of a cell is not selected, the neighboring cell planning is not
required in the cell.
Figure 3-67 Filtering cells

Intra-Frequency tab page: Parameters for intra-frequency neighboring cell

planning are set on the Intra-Frequency tab page.
 Max Neighbor Number of Indoor Cell: indicates the maximum number

of indoor intra-frequency neighboring cells.
 Max Neighbor Number of Outdoor Cell: indicates the maximum
number of outdoor intra-frequency neighboring cells.
 Force Symmetry: indicates whether to forcibly configure cells as
bidirectional neighboring cells.
Inter-Frequency tab page: Parameters related to inter-frequency neighboring
cell planning can be set on the Inter-Frequency tab page.
 Max Neighbor Number of Indoor Cell: indicates the maximum number

of indoor inter-frequency neighboring cells.
 Max Neighbor Number of Outdoor Cell: indicates the maximum
number of outdoor inter-frequency neighboring cells.
 Force Symmetry: indicates whether to forcibly configure cells as
bidirectional neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT tab page: The Inter-RAT tab page is available when other
network systems (such as UMTS and GSM) are available. You can set
parameters related to the inter-RAT neighboring cell planning on the
Inter-RAT tab page.

 Blind Handover Parameter area

Co-Site Distance: indicates the co-site distance. The default distance is
30 m. If the distance between two inter-RAT base stations is less than or
equal to the value of this parameter, the cells under the two base stations
are considered as co-site cells. If two base stations in LTE-FDD and
GSM/UMTS networks are equipped with multiple antennas (or
repeaters), the cells under the two base stations are considered as co-site
cells only if the distances between all antennas (or repeaters) of the
LTE-FDD base station and antennas (or repeaters) of the GSM/UMTS
base station are less than or equal to the value of this parameter.
 Topology Parameter area: This option is required when planning
inter-RAT neighboring cells in topology mode.
− Co-Transceiver Azimuth Difference: indicates the co-transceiver
azimuth difference. The default azimuth difference is 5o. If the
difference between the antenna azimuths of two cells is less than or
equal to the co-transceiver azimuth difference, the two cells are
considered as co-transceiver cells. If two base stations in LTE-FDD
and GSM/UMTS networks are equipped with multiple antennas (or
repeaters), the cells under the two base stations are considered as
co-transceiver cells only if the azimuth difference between all
antennas (or repeaters) of the LTE-FDD base station and antennas (or
repeaters) of the GSM/UMTS base station is less than or equal to the
value of this parameter.
− Min Signal Level(dBm): indicates the minimal receive signal level.
The default minimal receive signal level is -110 (dBm).
 Prediction Parameter area: This option is required when planning
inter-RAT neighboring cells in prediction mode.
Best Handover Area Percent: indicates the best handover area
proportion. The default value is 90(%). In multi-mode networks, the Best
Server area of an LTE-FDD cell may overlap with the Best Server area
of a GSM or UMTS cell. The proportion of this overlap area to the Best
Server area of an LTE-FDD cell is called the handover area proportion.

This proportion must be greater than or equal to the value of Best
Handover Area Percent.
 Inter-RAT Config area: This option is used to set handover rules of
inter-RAT neighboring cells.
− SourceNetType: indicates the network system of source cell to be
planned.
− To: indicates the network system of the target cells after the handover.
The parameter value can be either UMTS or GSM.
− Min Signal Level(dBm): indicates the minimal receive signal level
of an inter-RAT neighboring cell when the inter-RAT neighboring cell
is planned in prediction mode or in prediction + topology mode.
− Handover Threshold(dB): indicates the inter-RAT handover
threshold when the inter-RAT neighboring cell is planned in
prediction mode or in prediction + topology mode. The handover
threshold refers to the threshold at which the UE handover may occur.
The value is set based on the experience, and the default value is 6.
− Max Number: indicates the maximum number of inter-RAT
neighboring cells in the planned cell.
Running the Neighboring Cell Auto-Planning

After preceding parameters are set, click RUN to run the neighboring cell
auto-planning, as shown in Figure 3-71.
Figure 3-71 Running the neighboring cell auto-planning
During the running progress, you can right-click LTE and choose Stop
Neighbor Allocation to stop the neighboring cell auto-planning.

Figure 3-72 Stopping neighboring cell auto-planning
Viewing Planning Results

After the planning is complete, you can view the planning results in tables or
in geographical display mode.
Step 1 Viewing planning results in tables
After the neighboring cell auto-planning is complete, a window is
automatically displayed, as shown in Figure 3-73. You can also right-click
LTE and choose Open Neighbor Relations on the Operation tab page of the
Project Explorer pane to display the neighboring cell worksheet.
The Cell box on the displayed window indicates the list of all cells in the
system. By default, all the planned cells are displayed if the worksheet is
automatically displayed after the neighboring cell planning is complete.
Otherwise, all cells on the entire network are displayed. After you click a cell
from the Cell box, neighboring cells of the selected cell are displayed on the
worksheet on the right.
Figure 3-73 Viewing neighboring cell planning results in tables

 Sequence: indicates the priority of neighboring cells.

 Neighbor name: indicates the name of a neighboring cell.
 Blind Handover: indicates a neighboring cell for blind handover. This
parameter is applicable only to inter-RAT neighboring cells.
 Cause: indicates the reason for configuring a cell as the neighboring cell
of the serving cell. The value of this parameter can be co-site (indicating
that the cell is under the same base station as the serving cell), topology
(indicating that the neighboring cell is selected on the basis of network
topology), coverage (indicating that the neighboring cell is selected on
the basis of prediction results), symmetry (indicating that the cell is
forcibly configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure
bidirectional neighboring relationships), force (indicating the
neighboring relationships manually added by users), and existed
(indicating the existing neighboring relationships on the network).
 Confirm: If this parameter is selected, a cell is confirmed as the
neighboring cell of the serving cell. When neighboring cell relationships
are submitted to NEs, the cell is submitted as a neighboring cell. When
the cell is exported, the status of the cell is not Deleted.
Colors of records in the worksheet have different meanings:
 Black fonts: indicates the neighboring cell relationships available both in
the planning results and in existing neighboring cells.
 Red fonts: indicates the neighboring cell relationships available only in
the planning result.
 Gray fonts: indicates the neighboring cell relationship only in the
existing neighboring cells. If the planning results are submitted to NEs,
the planning results also become gray.
 Blue: indicates the neighboring cell relationships that are forcibly added
by a user.
Step 2 Viewing planning results in geographical display mode

Right-click LTE and choose Display Option on the Operation tab page of
the Project Explorer pane to display the geographical display mode of
neighboring cells.
Figure 3-74 Geographically displaying neighboring cells
After you choose Display Option, the following dialog box is displayed:
Figure 3-75 Setting the geographical display mode of neighboring cells
 Display Links: If this parameter is selected, neighboring relationships

are displayed by lines. An arrow indicates a unidirectional neighboring
cell relationship and no arrow indicates a directional neighboring cell
relationship.
 Color-Link: indicates setting different colors of the lines corresponding

to different neighboring cell relationships. After you click Color Link,
the LTE Neighbor Relation Links Color dialog box is displayed. You
can change the colors of the lines corresponding to different neighboring
cell relationships.
Figure 3-76 Setting the colors of connection lines for the geographical display
mode of neighboring cells
 Display Cell Color: If this parameter is selected, neighboring cell

relationships are displayed in cell colors.
 Color-Cell: Different cell colors can be set to correspond to different
neighboring cell relationships. After you click OK, the LTE Neighbor
Relation Cells Color dialog box is displayed. You can change the cell
colors corresponding to different neighboring cell relationships:

Figure 3-77 Setting cell colors for the geographical display of neighboring cells
 Selected Cell Color: sets the display color of the source cell.
 Fit Neighbor Cells Visible: displays the neighboring cell relationships
of a cell on the center of the map and zoom out the map to a proper
proportion after you select the cell in the neighboring cell relationship
table.
 Select Neighbor type: selects the neighboring cell types for the
geographical display.
 Intra Frequency Neighbors: If this parameter is selected,
intra-frequency neighboring cell relationships are displayed.
 Inter Frequency Neighbors: If this parameter is selected,
inter-frequency neighboring cell relationships are displayed.
 Inter-RAT Neighbors: If this parameter is selected, inter-RAT
neighboring cell relationships are displayed.
After the preceding settings are complete, enable the geographical display
function, that is, select LTE on the Project Explorer pane. (If LTE is not
selected on the Project Explorer pane, the geographical display function is
disabled.) Then, select the cells whose neighboring cell relationships are to be
viewed on the GIS map or in the table. The geographical display result is

Figure 3-78 Geographical display of neighboring cells
----End
Manually Adjusting Planning Results

After the neighboring cell auto-planning is complete, the U-Net provides two
modes for adjusting neighboring cell relationships of some cells when
necessary.
 In the neighboring cell relationship table, deselect the Confirm column
of unnecessary neighboring cells and select the Confirm column of
necessary neighboring cells.
 Adjust neighboring cells on the GIS map. The function of geographical
display of neighboring cells needs to be enabled before parameters are
adjusted.
Geographical unidirectional operation (addition/deletion): Select a source cell,
press Ctrl + left mouse button to add the selected target cell to the list of
neighboring cells of the source cell. If the target cell has been available in the
list of neighboring cells of the source cell, the target cell is deleted from the
list of neighboring cells of the target cell.
Geographical bidirectional operation (addition/deletion): Select a source cell,
press Shift + left mouse button to add bidirectional neighboring cell
relationships. If the neighboring cells have been configured as bidirectional
neighboring cell relationships, the bidirectional neighboring cell relationships
are deleted.
Submitting Planning Results

Right-click a planning result in the Cell box, the following window is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-79. Click Commit All to submit all
neighboring cell planning results in the Confirm column to NEs.

Figure 3-79 Submitting neighboring cell planning results
Exporting Planning Results

Right-click a planning result in the Cell box. The following window is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-80.
Figure 3-80 Exporting neighboring cell relationships
Click Export. The following dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-81.
You can choose Incremental Export (exporting only added or deleted
neighboring cell relationships) or Full Export and click Export to export
intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-RAT neighboring cell relationships
at the same time.
The incremental export needs to be performed before planning results are submitted.
Figure 3-81 Selecting the mode for exporting neighboring cell relationships

The procedure for exporting .xls files is as follows: The comparison status
between planning results and existing neighboring cells are displayed in the
Status column:
 Added: Added neighboring cell relationship.
 No Change: Existing neighboring cell relationship.
 Deleted: Deleted neighboring cell relationship
Figure 3-82 Export files of neighboring cell relationships
Generating Neighboring Cell Scripts

Prepare neighboring cell planning scripts according to the generated
neighboring cell planning results.
3.2.3 Neighboring Cell Replanning When Partial

Network Is Expanded
Importing Neighboring Cell Relationships of the Original Network
The neighboring cell relationships of the original network can be obtained
from MML scripts and then be imported based on the import templates
supported by the U-Net.
On the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, right-click LTE and choose
Import Neighbor Relations to display the Import Neighbor Relations
dialog box, as shown in Figure 3-83.

Figure 3-83 Importing neighboring cell relationships (1)
The Import Neighbor Relations dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure

3-84.
Figure 3-84 Importing neighboring cell relationships (2)
Update Blind Handover Flag: If this parameter is selected, blind handover

flags of cells are updated when the neighboring relationships are imported.
Click Browse to import the template (with the name of ExportExcel.xls)
based on neighboring cell relationships and import neighboring cell
relationships:
You can import neighboring cell relationships whose statuses are Added and
No Change.
CellName and NeighborCellName need to match cells in NEs and must be
unique.

See section -1183589120.52
Planning Neighbor based on existed Neighbor must be selected in the planning

parameters.


See section -1183589120.52
Before running the neighboring cell auto-planning, ensure that the base station
information, transceiver information, and cell information about the base station to be
expanded have been imported to the U-Net.

See section -1183589120.52

See section 0
Do not submit planning results after the planning results are manually adjusted.

See section -1183589120.52
After the incremental import, statuses of neighboring cell relationships are Added or
Deleted.
3.2.4 Planning Neighboring Cells of 4G Networks Using

Neighboring Cells of 2G/3G Networks
Usually, 4G networks are deployed in areas where original 2G/3G networks
are deployed. Therefore, neighboring cells of 2G/3G networks can be referred
to when planning neighboring cells of 4G networks. This section describes the
method for planning 4 G neighboring cells on the entire network in areas
where 2G/3G networks are deployed.
When importing the cell information before the planning, you need to import the cell
information of 2G/3G networks and the cell information of 4G networks respectively.
Importing Neighboring Cell Relationships of 2G/3G Networks

See section -1183589120.52
When importing neighboring cell relationships of 2G/3G networks, you need to

choose GSM/UMTS under Neighbor Planning, as shown in Figure 3-85.

Figure 3-85 Importing neighboring cell relationships of 2G/3G networks

See section -1183589120.52

 When the neighboring cell planning function is enabled, right-click LTE. In the
displayed window, choose Neighbor Automatic Allocation.
 When setting parameters, Force Using Co-site 2G/3G Neighbor for Reference
must be selected.
Figure 3-86 Referring to neighboring cell relationships of 2G/3G networks

See section -1183589120.52

See section -1183589120.52

See section 0

See section -1183589120.52


See section -1183589120.52

See section -1183589120.52
3.2.5 Checking Configurations of Neighboring Cells

Importing Neighboring Cell Relationships
See section -1183589120.52
Filtering and Auditing Configurations of Neighboring Cells

Step 1 Filtering Neighboring Cell Relationships
Right-click any place in the Cell column of the planning result table and
choose Filter.
Figure 3-87 Filtering neighboring cell relationships
The following window is displayed:

Figure 3-88 Criteria for filtering neighboring cell relationships
 Source area: sets filtering objects.

− Source Cell: selects the scope of cells to be filtered. All indicates
cells on the entire network and Planning indicates cells within the
planning scope (that is, Polygon).
− Intra-Frequency: filters the intra-frequency neighboring cells.
− Inter-Frequency: filters the inter-frequency neighboring cells.
− Inter-RAT: filters the inter-RAT neighboring cells.
 Condition area: sets filter criterion of cells to be filtered.
− None: sets on filter criterion.
− Empty List: filters the cells whose neighboring cells are not
configured.
− Missing Co-Site: filters the cells that do not configure co-site cells as
neighboring cells.
− Missing Symmetry: filters the bidirectional neighboring cells that are
not configured.
− List >No: filters the neighboring cells whose neighboring cells are
more than the specified value.
− Same PCI: filters the neighboring cells with the same PCI.
You can choose only one from the preceding filter criteria.
After the filter criterion is set, click OK. The cells that meet the filter criterion
are displayed.
Step 2 Auditing Neighboring Cell Relationships
Right-click an item in Cell column of the planning result table and choose
Audit.

Figure 3-89 Auditing neighboring cell relationships
Figure 3-90 Criteria for auditing neighboring cell relationships
Percentage of Reference Neighbors: indicates the percentage of cells whose

neighboring cells are generated by referring to the existing neighboring cell
relationships of cells.
Except for Percentage of Reference Neighbors, other parameters are the
same as those for filtering neighboring cell relationships. You can select
neighboring cells that meet multiple criteria. After the audit criterion is set,
click OK. The cells meeting the audit criterion are displayed.

Figure 3-91 Result files of auditing neighboring cell relationships
----End
Checking Miss-Configured Neighboring Cell Relationships

The principle for checking miss-configured neighboring cell relationships is
as follows: Perform the planning based on the current neighboring cell
planning algorithm of the U-Net. Compare neighboring cells in the planning
result with those on the live network to find miss-configured neighboring
cells.
1. Neighboring Cell Planning
Perform the neighboring cell planning again based on the distribution of base
stations on the live network by referring to section 3.1.1 "Setting Prediction
Parameters."
You need to select Planning Neighbor based on existed Neighbor when performing
the neighboring cell planning.
2. Checking Miss-Configured Neighboring Cell Relationships
You can import the neighboring cell planning result based on the distribution
of base stations on the live network by increment. Neighboring cell
relationships whose statuses are Added do not exist in the neighboring cell
relationships configured on the live network. These neighboring cell
relationships are regarded as miss-configured neighboring cell relationships.
3.3 PCI Planning

For the planning of the LTE PCI, you can calculate the interference in
prediction mode or topology mode and perform the PCI planning based on the
interference. The PCI planning supports the scenarios of network creation,
capacity expansion in a large scope, and segmental capacity expansion. The
protocol specifies that PCIs ranging from 0 to 503 can be used. Under the
reduced bandwidth, the number of PCIs that can be planned is smaller based
on different bandwidths.
3.3.1 Setting PCI Planning Parameters

To set PCI planning parameters in parameter templates to be imported,
perform the following steps:
Step 1 Set site parameters.

For details, see Table 3-1.
Step 2 Set transceiver parameters.
Step 3 Set LTE-FDD cell parameters.
LTE-FDDCell.xls
Table 3-7 Settings of LTE-FDD cell parameters for PCI planning

*Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver.

*Cell Name Name of a cell.
current cell.
*Frequency Band Name of a frequency band.
PCI ID of a physical cell. (The PCI of
an existing cell is mandatory in the
expansion scenario.)
PCI Reuse Distance(Km) PCI reuse distance.
PCI Reuse Tier(Neighbor) Number of PCI reuse tiers.
Step 4 Set LTE-TDD cell parameters.

cell parameters.
----End
3.3.2 PCI Planning of a New/Expanded Network

Setting of PCI Planning
right-click LTE PCI Planning and choose Automatic Allocation…, as
Figure 3-92 Window for setting the LTE PCI planning
The window for PCI planning is displayed.
Figure 3-93 LTE PCI planning (1)

 Reserve Ratio: indicates the PCI reservation proportion. A certain

proportion of PCIs is reserved among the available PCIs for indoor
coverage or high-sites.
 Start End: indicates the scope of PCIs that can be used for the planning.
The protocol specifies that PCIs ranging from 0 to 503 can be used.
 Area: indicates the PCI planning area.
 Filter: filters cells in the Area box to filter cells that do not need to be
planned.
 Load: imports the cluster information before planning the PCI and the
PCI usage. When the planning is performed again, you can perform the
segmental capacity expansion based on the imported information. For
details about the cluster information about the segmental capacity
expansion, see section 02.
Parameters on the Control Parameter tab page are as follows:

 Max Interference Distance(km): indicates the maximum inter-cell
interference distance. Inter-cell interference exceeds the distance is not
calculated.
 With Neighbor: indicates that two neighboring cells cannot use the same
PCI. If the PCIs of two neighboring cells are the same, the neighboring
cell planning must be performed or the neighboring cell relationships
must be manually modified.
 RS-Timing Shift: indicates whether to support the transmitting of RS
signals of cells under a site at different time. This parameter is used to
support functions of products developed by Huawei. Currently, Huawei

does not provide such products. Therefore, this parameter is optional.
 With Exist PCI: indicates whether to take into account the impact of the
sites whose PCIs are planned on the sites whose PCIs are to be planned.
This parameter is selected in the scenario of capacity expansion in a large
scope (hybrid capacity expansion). For the capacity expansion scenario,
you need to set cells with PCIs in the project.
 With Compressed Frequency Bandwidth: indicates whether to support
the PCI planning in the compressed bandwidth networking. The protocol
specifies that PCIs ranging from 0 to 503 can be used. The number of
available PCIs becomes smaller. The number of available PCIs varies
with the bandwidth.
Parameters on the Advanced Parameter tab page are as follows:

 Topology: Select Topology to plan PCIs based on the network topology.
 Prediction: Select Prediction to plan PCIs based on the prediction
results.
 Min Signal Level (dbm): indicates the threshold of minimal receive
signal level.
 Handover area threshold (dB): indicates the handover area threshold.
 Shadowing taken into account: selects Shadowing taken into account to
take into account the shadow fading during the calculation of path loss.
 Cell Edge Coverage Probability (%): sets the cell edge coverage
probability in Cell Edge Coverage Probability(%).

 Indoor Coverage: selects Indoor Coverage to take into account indoor

coverage during the calculation of path loss.
Running the PCI Auto-Planning

After preceding parameters are set, click RUN to run the PCI auto-planning,
Figure 3-96 LTE PCI auto-planning
If PCIs used for the planning are insufficient or the number of preserved PCIs
is excessively large, the window shown in Figure 3-97 is displayed.
Figure 3-97 Example when PCIs are insufficient

Figure 3-98 Displayed message when PCIs are insufficient
During the PCI auto-planning, you can choose STOP PCI Codes Planning to
stop the PCI auto-planning.
Figure 3-99 Stopping the LTE PCI auto-planning

After the planning is complete, you can view the planning results in tables or
in geographical display mode.
1. Viewing planning results in tables
After the PCI auto-planning is complete, the following window is
automatically displayed, as shown in Figure 3-100. You can also right-click
LTE PCI Planning on the Operation tab page of the Project Explorer pane
and choose Open PCI Code… to display the PCI table.

Figure 3-100 Viewing LTE PCI planning results
Figure 3-101 Table of LTE PCI results
 Cell Name: indicates the name of a cell.

 PCI Block: indicates the ID of a cell cluster.
 Existing Code: indicates the existing PCI value of a cell.
 Suggest Code: indicates the planned PCI value of a cell.
 Confirm Code: indicates the confirmed PCI value. You can modify the
parameter value in the table.
2. Viewing planning results in geographical display mode
 The PCIs can be displayed in geographical mode, that is, PCIs in the
Confirm Code column are displayed.
On the Network tab page of the Project Explorer pane, right-click
Transceiver and choose Display Setting to set the display mode.

Figure 3-102 Viewing LTE PCIs in geographical display mode
In the displayed window, you can add PCIs to the display area.
Figure 3-103 Setting the geographical display of PCIs

After the preceding settings are complete, PCIs of each cell are displayed on
the GIS map.
Figure 3-104 Geographical display of LTE PCIs
 PCIs are displayed in geographical display mode. Select cells that have
the same PCI, PCI Mod3, or PCI Mod6 with the selected cell.
On the Operation tab page of the Project Explorer pane, right-click LTE
PCI Planning and choose Display Option.

Figure 3-106 Displaying colors of LTE PCIs in geographical display S mode
 Display Links: specifies whether to display lines between cells that have
the same PCI/PCI Mod3/PCI Mod6 with the selected cell.
 Color-Link: sets the color of the line between the selected cell and cells
that have the same PCI/PCI Mod3/PCI Mod6 with the selected cell.

 Display Cell Color: indicates whether to display the cells that have the
same PCI/PCI Mod3/PCI Mod6 with the selected cell.
 Color-Cell: sets the color of the cells that have the same PCI/PCI
Mod3/PCI Mod6 with the selected cell.
 Select Cell Color: sets the color of the selected cell.
 Same PCI: displays cells that have the same PCI with the selected cell.
 Same PCI Mod3: displays cells that have the same PCI Mod3 with the
selected cell. The number of transceiver ports must be equal to or greater
than 2.
 Same PCI Mod6: displays cells that have the same PCI Mod6 with the
selected cell. The number of transceiver ports is 1.
Figure 3-107 Displaying colors of LTE PCIs in geographical display mode

(color-link)
Set the connection line mode of the cells that have the same PCI/ PCI
Mod3/PCI Mod6 with the selected cell.
 Display Type: indicates the type of display data, interval or discrete.
 Field Type: indicates the display data.
 Color: indicates the color of display data.
 Value: indicates the value of display data.
 Legend: indicates the name of display data in the legend.
 Add To Legend: indicates whether to add the coloring scheme of the
clutter class to the legend.
 Transparency: indicates the transparency of display color.

Figure 3-108 Displaying colors of LTE PCIs in geographical display mode

(color-cell)
Set the mode of the cells that have the same PCI/ PCI Mod3/PCI Mod6 with
the selected cell.
 Display Type: indicates the display type of layer data, such as
continuous or discontinuous.
 Field Type: indicates the display data.
 Color: indicates the color of display data.
 Value: indicates the value of display data.
 Legend: indicates the legend description of display data.
 Add To Legend: indicates whether to add the coloring scheme of the
clutter class to the legend.
 Transparency: indicates the transparency of display color.
After the preceding parameters are set, enable the geographical display switch,
that is, select LTE PCI Planning (if LTE PCI Planning is deselected, the
switch is disabled). Select the cells whose PCIs are to be displayed on the map.
The displayed result is as follows:

Manually Adjusting PCIs

1. Adjust PCI planning results.
After the PCI planning is complete, network planning engineers can modify
PCIs of cells according to the actual situation. The U-Net provides a quick
and convenient way to modify PCIs of cells, that is, change the Confirm
Code column of cells in the displayed PCI display table.
2. Adjust existing PCIs.
Double-click a transceiver on the GIS map to display the Transceiver
Properties window. Switch to the LTE-FDDCell tab page to modify the
existing PCIs.

Figure 3-110 Adjusting existing PCIs

Right-click the planning result table to display the PCI Planning Display
window. Click Commit to submit all confirm codes to NEs.
Figure 3-111 Submitting LTE PCI planning results

1. The U-Net supports the exporting of common planning results.
window. Click Export to export all contents in the current PCI table.
Figure 3-112 Exporting LTE PCI planning results
The U-Net supports the exporting of planning results in XLS, CSV, and TXT
files, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-113 Template of exporting PCI planning results
2. The U-Net supports the exporting of the cluster information about the
segmental capacity expansion.
window. Click Export PCI Block Configuration to export the planning
information about the segmental capacity expansion.

Figure 3-114 Exporting the cluster information about PCIs that support the
segmental capacity expansion
The U-Net supports the exporting of planning results in CFG files, as shown
in the following figure.
Figure 3-115 Template for exporting PCI planning results (cluster information)
Filtering and Auditing Planning Results

1. Filtering Planning Results
window and choose Filter.

Figure 3-116 Filtering LTE PCIs
Figure 3-117 Filtering LTE PCI results
 Filter Target: indicates the range of cells to be filtered. All indicates all
cells on the entire network and Planning indicates cells in the planning
scope.
 Max Interference Distance(km): indicates the maximum interference
distance. When cells are filtered, the maximum interference distance is
used to calculate the layer-0 neighboring base stations of the cells to be
filtered. Cells whose distances are greater than the maximum
interference distance are not collected.
 None: No condition is specified.
 Reuse Tier: indicates the cells where the number of PCI reuse layers is
smaller than or equal to the set value. The maximum interference
distance needs to be set.
 Reuse Distance (km): indicates the cells where the PCI reuse distance is
smaller than or equal to the set value. The maximum interference
distance needs to be set.
 Same PCI MOD6 Ratio: indicates the proportion of cells that have the
same PCI mode 6 with the specified cell on the corresponding layer-0
base stations. The maximum interference distance needs to be set. The
value of Number of Antenna Ports is 1.
 Same PCI MOD3 Ratio: indicates the proportion of cells that have the
same PCI mode 3 with the specified cell on the corresponding layer-0
base stations. The maximum interference distance needs to be set. The
value of Number of Antenna Ports is equal to or greater than 2.
You can select only one from the preceding five conditions to filter LTE PCI
results.
After configuring the condition, click OK. The cells that meet the filter
condition are displayed in the PCI table.
2. Auditing Planning Results
window and choose Audit.
Figure 3-118 Auditing LTE PCI results

Figure 3-119 Setting the auditing of LTE PCI results
Parameters in the Audit window are the same as those in the Filter window.
The difference is that you can simultaneously select cells that meet multiple
conditions. After you click OK, a excel sheet is generated. One worksheet is
generated for one audit condition. After you open an excel worksheet, the
following texts are displayed, showing the statistics information about cells
that meet conditions.

Figure 3-120 Displaying the statistics of LTE PCI results
3.3.3 Checking the PCI Planning

For a running network, the PCI planning is continuously changing due to
causes such as capacity expansion. Therefore, you need to periodically check
whether the PCI distribution is reasonable.
The principle for checking the PCI planning is to check whether the PCI
distribution is interleaving. When the number of cell ports is equal to or
greater than 2, check whether the PCI Mod3 distribution is interleaving. When
the number of cell ports is 1, check whether the PCI Mod6 distribution is
interleaving.
Importing Cells Whose PCIs Have Been Planned

PCIs can be imported when the cell information is imported for a new project.

Figure 3-121 Importing the cell PCI information

See section -1183589120.52
Checking PCIs
On the Operation tab page of the Project Explorer plane, right-click LTE
PCI Planning and choose Open PCI Codes to display the PCI table.

Figure 3-122 Checking PCIs
In the PCI display window, right-click a cell and choose Audit. For details,
see section 3.3.1.7. You can simultaneously select cells that meet multiple
conditions. Generally, all cells are selected. Click OK. The checking result is
generated and saved in an excel worksheet. You can check the excel
worksheet to check whether the PCI planning is reasonable.
Generally, you need to focus on the Reuse Tier and Reuse Distance tab pages
to find cells whose reuse tiers or reuse distances do not meet requirements. In
addition, check whether the PCI planning is reasonable based on the actual
situation. Manually modify the PCI planning if it is unreasonable.
3.4 PRACH Planning

3.4.1 Setting PRACH Planning Parameters
To set PRACH planning parameters in parameter templates to be imported,
LTE-FDDCell.xls

Table 3-8 Settings of LTE-FDD cell parameters for PRACH planning


current carrier.
band.
*High Speed Data rate in a cell.
Radius(m) Radius of a cell. (The radius of an
existing cell must be imported.)
Min Root Sequence Index Minimum ZC root sequence of a
cell. (The minimum ZC root
sequence of a cell must be
imported.)
Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) Number of PRACH reuse tiers.
(The value of this parameter is
determined based on neighbor
relationships.)
LTE-TDDCell.xls
Table 3-9 Settings of LTE-TDD cell parameters for PRACH planning


current carrier.
band.



*High Speed Data rate in a cell.
Radius(m) Radius of a cell. (The radius of an
existing cell must be imported.)
Min Root Sequence Index Minimum ZC root sequence of a
cell. (The minimum ZC root
sequence of a cell must be
imported.)
Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) Number of PRACH reuse tiers.
(The value of this parameter is
determined based on neighbor
relationships.)
*Preamble Format Preamble sequence, which is used
for a user to access a cell randomly.
----End
3.4.2 PRANCH Planning of a New Network

right-click LTE PRACH Planning and choose Automatic Allocation, as
shown in Figure 3-123 (an example of LTE-FDD).
Figure 3-123 Window for setting PRACH parameters
The window for setting parameters is displayed.

Figure 3-124 Window for setting parameters
The parameters are as follows:

Calculate Cell Radius: indicates whether to re-calculate the radius of the
planning cell. If this option is not selected, the cell radius set for an NE is used.
If this option is selected, the cell radius is re-calculated.
Propagation Radius: indicates that the cell radius is calculated by using the
calculation radius of the propagation model. The concrete algorithm is as
follows:
Cell radium = Radius of the propagation model x Propagation Radius Factor
Coverage Radius: indicates that the cell radius is calculated by using the
signal coverage of cells. You need to set Min Signal Level(dBm), the
minimal level threshold of the coverage. Besides Min Signal Level(dBm),
you can set the following optional parameters:
Shadowing taken into account: indicates whether shadow fading is taken
into account during the calculation of the signal coverage of cells.
Cell Edge Coverage Probability(%): indicates the proportion of the strength
of receive signals greater than the level threshold at the cell edge coverage.
Indoor Coverage: indicates whether the indoor coverage is taken into
account.
Area: selects the area where PRACHs are to be planned. You can select all the
cells in an area or click Cell Filter to select only the cells to be planned in the
area. In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the
search direction, and set whether to match cases.
Cell Filter: After you click Cell Filter, the cell filter window is displayed. You
can accurately set the cells to be planned, as shown in Figure 3-125.
Figure 3-125 Filtering planning cells
Running the PRACH Auto-Planning

After setting parameters in section "Setting Planning Parameters", you can
click Run to run the PRACH auto-planning.
Figure 3-126 Running the PRACH auto-planning
II. 4Viewing PRACH Planning Results

You can view PRACH planning results in any of the following ways:
1. You can view PRACH planning results in the planning result window.

After you click Run, the PRACH auto-planning is started. After the PRACH
auto-planning is complete, the PRACH planning result is displayed, as shown
in Figure 3-127.
Figure 3-127 Window of the PRACH planning result

Cell Name: indicates the name of a cell.
HighSpeed: indicates whether the cell is a high-speed cell. In PRACH
planning, high-speed cells are preferentially planned.
NCS: indicates the cyclic shift, that is, the configuration of zero-correlated
cells allocated for a cell. The value of this parameter is a result of the PRACH
planning. The possible values of this parameter are as follows:
High-speed cell: 15, 18, 22, 26, 32, 38, 46, 55, 68, 82, 100, 128, 158, 202, or
237
Low-speed cell: 0, 13, 15, 18, 22, 26, 32, 38, 46, 59, 76, 93, 119, 167, 279, or
419
Cell Radius: indicates the radius of a cell.
Existed Min Root Sequence Index: indicates the existing start ZC root
sequence index of the cell.
Suggested Start Root Sequence Index: indicates the planned start ZC root
Suggested End Root Sequence Index: indicates the planned end ZC root
Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index: indicates the confirmed start ZC
root sequence index.
Confirmed End Root Sequence Index: indicates the confirmed end ZC root
sequence index.
Reuse Tier (Topology): indicates the minimal number of reuse tiers based on
the geographical location.
Reuse Distance: indicates the PARCH reuse distance, that is, the minimal
reuse distance when the same root sequence is reused.
Reuse Tier (Neighbor): indicates the minimal number of reuse tiers based on
neighboring relationship.

Actual Required Reuse Tier (Neighbor): indicates the actually required

number of reuse tiers when resources are allocated to cells.
Lower Reuse Tier (Neighbor): indicates whether the number of reuse tiers is
reduced when resources are allocated to cells.
After the auto-planning is complete, you can view the planning result in any
of the following ways:
On the Project Explorer pane, right-click LTE PRACH Planning and
choose Open PRACH Parameter.
Figure 3-128 Displaying the window of the planning result
The window of the PRACH planning result is displayed.

2. You can display the existing start/end ZC root sequence index of the cell
on the GIS map.
On the Network tab page of the Project Explorer pane, right-click
Transceiver and choose Display Setting.
Figure 3-129 Viewing the planning result on the GIS map (1)
On the Label Display tab page of the Display Field window, remove Min
Root Sequence Index to the Selected Fields area and click OK.

The existing start/end ZC root sequence index of each cell is displayed on the
GIS map, as shown in Figure 3-131.
3. View reuse cells on the GIS map.

Select LTE PRACH Planning on the Project Explorer Pane, as shown in
Figure 3-132.

Figure 3-132 Selecting LTE PRACH Planning
Select a transceiver on the GIS map. The transceivers that have ZC root reuse
relationship with the selected transceiver are displayed on the GIS map, as
Figure 3-133 Displaying transceivers that have reuse relationship with the
selected transceiver on the GIS map
Checking PRACH Planning Results

Checking PRACH planning results refers to check the reuse distance and the
number of reuse tiers (including the number of topology tiers and the number
of neighboring cell tiers) and check whether the reuse distance of the ZC root
is further enough and whether the number of reuse tiers is large enough.
When collecting the number of reuse tiers, you can set the number of reuse tiers
required by the customer so that only the reuse tiers within the set threshold are
collected. Therefore, the checking speed is improved. The operation procedure is as
follows:

In the planning result window, right-click a record and choose Set Output
Reuse Neighbor Tier.
Figure 3-134 Setting the number of reuse tiers to be checked (1)
In the displayed Set Output Reuse Neighbor Tier window, set Limit Output
Reuse Neighbor Tier and click OK. For example, set Limit Output Reuse
Neighbor Tier to 0.
After clicking OK, results in the Reuse Tier(Neighbor) column are changed.
Cells are identified if the number of reuse tiers exceeds the threshold, as
shown in Figure 3-136
Manually Adjusting PRACH Planning Results

If you are not satisfied with the automatic PRACH planning results, you can
modify the results by double-clicking Confirmed Start Root Sequence
Index. Then, modify the results when the cell result is editable, as shown in
Figure 3-137.

Figure 3-137 Manually adjusting planning results (1)
After the planning results are modified, the ZC root sequence and its reuse
relations are calculated again. For example, when the start ZC root sequence
of the first cell shown in Figure 3-137 is set to 207, the following result is
displayed.
Figure 3-138 Manually adjusting planning results (2)

In the planning result window, right-click a record and choose Commit to
submit planning results to the NEs.
Figure 3-139 Submitting planning results
Exporting PRACH Planning Results

In the PRACH planning result window, right-click a record and choose
Export.

Figure 3-140 Exporting planning results (1)
In the displayed window, select the columns to be exported.
Figure 3-141 Exporting planning results (2)
Click Export to export planning results.
3.5 Frequency Planning

3.5.1 Setting Frequency Planning Parameters
To set frequency planning parameters in parameter templates to be imported,

LTE-FDDCell.xls
Table 3-10 Settings of LTE-FDD cell parameters for frequency planning

*Transceiver Name Name of the transceiver to which a

cell belongs.
*Cell Name Name of a cell.
current cell.
*Frequency Band Information about a frequency band.

cell parameters.
----End
3.5.2 Frequency Planning in 1x1 + ICIC Networking

right-click LTE Frequency Planning and choose Automatic Allocation….
Figure 3-142 Displaying the window of setting planning parameters

The window of setting planning parameters is displayed.
Figure 3-143 Window of setting planning parameters
Parameter Description:
Parameters on the General tab page are described as follows:
 Min Interference Distance(km): indicates the minimal interference
distance, that is, the minimal distance between lay 0 base stations.
 Select Area: indicates the planning area. You can perform the planning
on the entire network or in the polygon area.
 Filter: After you click Filter, the Filter window is displayed. You can
filter the base stations to be planned.

Figure 3-144 Filtering planning cells
 Frequency Reuse Pattern: indicates the frequency reuse mode, that is,
1x1 mode or 1x3 mode.
Parameters on the Frequency tab page are described as follows:

Figure 3-145 Window of selecting bands and frequencies
 Frequency Band: indicates a frequency band. All frequency bands in the

Frequency Band drop-down list are displayed for your selection. The
selected frequency band is interacted with the following frequencies, that
is, the changes of frequency bands will lead to the changes of
frequencies.
 Channel Index: indicates the channel index to be allocated to the site.
For the 1x1 networking mode, only one channel index can be selected.
For the 1x3 networking mode, three channel indexes can be selected.
Running the Automatic Frequency Planning

After the preceding parameters are set, click Run to run the automatic
frequency planning.

After operations described in section 0 are complete, a planning result
window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-146.

Figure 3-146 Planning result window
 Site: indicates a site name.
 Transceiver: indicates a transceiver name.
 Frequency: indicates a frequency band.
 Bandwidth: indicates the allocated bandwidth.
 Channel Index: indicates a channel index.
 Edge Frequency(UL): indicates the frequency band used by CEUs in
the uplink service when the ICIC is enabled.
 Edge Frequency(DL): indicates the frequency band used by CEUs in
the downlink service when the ICIC is enabled.

After the planning is complete, if the planning results are acceptable, you can
click Commit in the planning result window shown in Figure 3-146 to submit
the planning results to NEs.

If you need to export the planning results, you can click Export in the
planning result window shown in Figure 3-146The data export window is
displayed. You can select the data line to be exported.

Figure 3-147 Exporting planning results
Checking Planning Results

1. Check the statistics data about the frequency planning.
After submitting planning results, you can check the allocation of channel
indexes to sites and the allocation of neighboring channel indexes to sites.
Right-click LTE Frequency Planning and choose Frequency Statistics.
Figure 3-148 Displaying the frequency statistics window
The Frequency Statistics window is displayed.

Figure 3-149 Window of statistics of planning results (1)
You need to set Frequency Band and Channel Index. After the parameters
are set, you can click Find to display all sites that obtain the frequency and its
inter-frequency sites.
For example, Figure 3-150 shows all sites with the channel index of 2 in the
2110 FDD – 1.4 MHz band and its inter-frequency sites, that is, sites with the
channel index of 1 or 3 in the 2110 FDD – 1.4MHz band.

Figure 3-150 Window of statistics of planning results (2)
The Same Frequency Statistics table shows the sites with the customized
frequency bands and channel index. The Neighbor Frequency Statistics table
shows the inter-frequency sites.
2. Render the GIS color of statistics results.
After operations described in section "Submitting Planning Results" are
complete, click Color to set the rendering color of target sites and that of
inter-frequency sites.
Figure 3-151 Window of setting the rendering color on the GIS map

 Same Frequency: indicates the color of a site with the specified
frequency.
 Neighbor Frequency: indicates the color of a inter-frequency site with
the specified frequency.
After the color is set, click OK. Click Geometry. These sites have been
rendered on the GIS map.
Figure 3-152 Displaying auditing results on the GIS map
Displaying Frequency Planning Results on the GIS Map

After submitting planning results to NEs, you can right-click Transceiver on
the Network tab page of the Project Explorer pane and choose Display
Setting.

Figure 3-153 Displaying frequency planning results on the GIS map (1)
The Display Field window is displayed.
On the Label Display tab page, choose Channel Index from the Available
Fields area and click to remove Channel Index to the Selected
Fields area.

Click OK. The frequency planning results are displayed on the GIS map, as
3.5.3 Frequency Planning in 1x3 Networking Mode

You can refer to section -1183589120.52 The only difference is that you
need to set Frequency Reuse Pattern to 1x3 and select three channel
indexes.

Figure 3-157 Displaying the parameter setting window
Figure 3-158 Setting the 1x3 networking mode
Running the Automatic Frequency Planning

After the preceding parameters are set, click Run to run the automatic
frequency planning.

See section 3.5.2 ‘Checking Planning Results.


See section "Checking PRACH Planning Results."

See section "Manually Adjusting PRACH Planning Results."
Checking Planning Results

See section "Manually Adjusting PRACH Planning Results."
Displaying Frequency Planning Results on the GIS Map

See section "Submitting Planning Results."
3.6 RF Planning
The LTE RF auto-planning function is used to adjust the antenna downtilt,
antenna azimuth, and power of the reference signal. The purpose is to meet
the target values set by users and decrease the dependence on the experience
of engineers for the live network and decrease the number of repeatedly
adjusting parameters.
3.6.1 Setting Planning Parameters

On the U-Net, create a new project and import related engineering parameters
or open an existed project. On the Operation tab page of the Project
Explorer pane, right-click LTE Cell Planning and choose New to start the
RF auto-planning, as shown in Figure 3-159.
Figure 3-159 Creating a RF planning group
After the RF auto-planning is started, you can set related planning parameters
in the displayed RF Planning window, as shown in Figure 3-160.
Figure 3-160 General tab page in the RF Planning window
Set the thresholds of RSRP and RS SINR.

The thresholds of RSRP and RS SINR refer to the thresholds of RSRP and RS
SINR expected by users. The thresholds cannot be set on the tab page on the
interface. You can set the thresholds in the RfConfig.xml file which is under
the same directory with the U-Net executable file (Huawei.UNet.exe). You
can set the parameters in the end of the file, as shown in Figure 3-161.

Figure 3-161 Setting the thresholds of RSRP and RS SINR
Setting Parameters on the General Tab Page in the RF Planning

Window
The General tab page is shown in Figure 3-160. Parameters on the General
tab page are described as follows:
 Name: indicates the name of an RF planning group. The default value is
Group0. You can modify the value as required.
 Analysis Area: indicates the analysis area. Cells in this area participate
in the adjustment of RF parameters. You can determine the scope of the
analysis area by choosing the polygon.
 Simulation Area: indicates the simulation area. Cells in this area are
considered for the RF planning. After the RF adjustment is complete, you
need to monitor the overall effect after the modification within an area.
The monitored area is the simulation area. If only one polygon is
imported in the project, the same polygon is selected for both the
analysis area and the simulation area. If multiple polygons are imported
in the project, the simulation area must contain the analysis area. For
example, the analysis area is Polygon_Draw_1 and the simulation area is
Polygon_Draw_2, as shown in Figure 3-162.

Figure 3-162 Location relations of simulation areas and analysis areas
 Max Iteration Count: indicates the maximum number of iterations. The

default value is 50.
 Resolution: indicates the precision in calculation. Generally, the value of
this parameter is the same as the map precision and the cell propagation
precision. The setting of the precision has great impact on the calculation.
The precision affects not only the reliability of the calculation result but
also the calculation time. The higher the precision, the longer the
calculation time. You can modify the calculation precision as required.
 RSRP Target Ratio: indicates the percentage of the areas where the
RSRP is equal to or greater than the RSRP threshold to the simulation
areas. It is an expected effect of the RSRP after the RF planning.
 RS SINR Target Ratio: indicates the percentage of the areas where the
RS SINR is equal to or greater than the RS SINR threshold to the
simulation areas. It is an expected effect of the RS SINR after the RF
planning.
 RSRP Fitness Weight: indicates the weight of the RSRP performance
study of a cell. RS SINR Fitness Weight + RSRP Fitness Weight = 1. It
specifies the weight of the RSRP during the planning. The default value
is 0.5. This indicates that RSRP has the same weight as RS SINR.
 RS SINR Fitness Weight: indicates the weight of the RS SINR
performance study of a cell. RSRP Fitness Weight + RS SINR Fitness
Weight = 1. It specifies the weight of the RS SINR during the planning.
 Calculate Now: indicates whether to perform the RF auto-planning
immediately. If this parameter is selected, after the parameters are set,
you can click OK to perform the RF auto-planning immediately. If this
parameter is not selected, after parameters are set, you can return to the
Project Explorer pane of the U-Net. Then, right-click the created RF

planning group and choose Calculate to perform the RF auto-planning,
Setting Parameters on the Control Parameter Tab Page in the RF

Planning Window
Figure 3-163 Control Parameter tab page in the RF Planning window

 Population Size: indicates the size of a population, that is, the total
number of individuals participated in the calculation in each iteration.
 Selection box: indicates whether the parameter participates in the
adjustment. If a parameter does not participate in the adjustment,
deselect the parameter.
The settings of three parameters are basically the same. The following is an
example of setting Antenna Tilt.
 Max Value: indicates the maximum downtilt angle.
 Min Value: indicates the minimal downtilt angle.
 Max Range: indicates the maximum adjustment range of the downtilt
angle.
 Min Range: indicates the minimal adjustment range of the downtilt
angle.

 Step Size: indicates the step length at which the downtilt angle is
adjusted.
The following is an example for describing meanings of these parameters.
The current downtilt angle of a cell is 3°. The setting of the downtilt angle is
as follows:
You need to set the following parameters:

 Set Max Value to 14. It indicates that the maximum downtilt angle of the
cell is 14° during the RF planning. The value is not related to the initial
downtilt angle of the cell.
 Set Min Value to 10. It indicates that the minimal downtilt angle of the
cell is –10° during the RF planning. The value is not related to the
initial downtilt angle of the cell.
 Set Max Range to 7. It indicates that the maximum downtilt angle of the
cell is 10° (3 + 7 = 10) during the RF planning. The value is related to
the initial downtilt angle of the cell. Max Range defines the maximum
adjustment range of the downtilt angle based on the initial downtilt angle
of the cell.
 Set Min Range to -5. It indicates that the minimal downtilt angle of the
cell is –2° (3 –5 =–2) during the RF planning. The value is related to
the initial downtilt angle of the cell. Min Range defines the minimal
adjustment range of the downtilt angle based on the initial downtilt angle
of the cell.
 Set Step Size to 1. It indicates that the step length is 1 during the RF
planning of the cell, that is, the downtilt angle of the cell is adjusted at
each degree.
3.6.2 Running the RF Planning

After set parameters on the preceding tab pages, click OK. If Calculate Now
is selected on the General tab page, the RF planning is performed
immediately. If Calculate Now is not selected, right-click a created planning
group on the Project Explorer pane and choose Calculate to perform the RF
planning, as shown in Figure 3-164.

Figure 3-164 Running the RF planning
During the running of the RF planning, the progress of the RF auto-planning

is displayed in the Event Viewer window of the U-Net. The changes of
Fitness (red line), RSRP Percent (blue line), and RS SINR Percent (green
line) as the number of iterations are displayed in the LTE RF Planning
window.
Figure 3-165 Interface during the RF planning
During the RF planning, you can right-click the RF planning group and
choose Stop to stop the RF planning group that is running.

3.6.3 Viewing RF Planning Results

When the progress bar displayed in the Event Viewer window disappears, the
RF planning is complete. Right-click an RF planning group (such as Group0)
and choose Result, as shown in Figure 3-166.
Figure 3-166 Displaying RF planning results
The RF Result window is displayed. The RF Result window has four tab
pages, General, Graph, Cell Parameters, and Quality. These tab pages are
described as follows:
General Tab Page

The General tab page mainly displays the best fitness of each iteration, as
Fitness = Weight of RSRP x Percentage of areas where the RSRP meets the
RSRP threshold + Weight of RS SINR x Percentage of areas where the RS
SINR meets the RS SINR threshold
Fitness: indicates the overall fitness value. The fitness represents the network
quality. The greater the value, the better the network quality. The smaller the
value, the poorer the network quality.

Figure 3-167 General tab page in the RF Result window
Graph Tab Page

The Graph tab page shows the changes of Fitness (red line), RSRP Percent
(blue line), and RS SINR Percent (green line) as the number of iterations.
Figure 3-168 Graph tab page in the RF Result window
Cell Parameters Tab Page

The Cell Parameters tab page shows the comparison of the azimuth, downtilt
angle, reference signal power, and fitness in each cell before and after the
optimization, as shown in Figure 3-169.

Figure 3-169 Cell Parameters tab page in the RF Result window
 Iteration: indicates the number of iterations. This parameter is closely

related to Action and Commit. That is, the exported data and submitted
data is data of the iteration set by Iteration.
 Action: indicates exporting the parameter comparison table of an
iteration.
 Commit: indicates submitting parameters of an iteration to the project.
 Transceiver: indicates the transceiver of the cell.
 Original Azimuth: indicates the initial azimuth of a cell.
 Optimized Azimuth: indicates the azimuth of a cell after calculation.
 Original RS Power: indicates the initial RS power of a cell.
 Optimized RS Power: indicates the RS power of a cell after calculation.
 Original Tilt: indicates the initial downtilt angle of a cell.
 Optimized Tilt: indicates the downtilt angle of a cell after calculation.
 Original Fitness: indicates the initial fitness value of a cell. The fitness
value represents cell performance. The higher the fitness value, the better
the cell performance.
 Optimized Fitness: indicates the fitness value of a cell after calculation.
Quality Tab Page

The Quality tab page shows the coverage prediction comparison figure of
RSRP and RS SINR before and after the optimization. You can view the
coverage prediction comparison figure of any two iterations by setting the
values of Iteration and Compare Iteration.
The RSRP coverage prediction comparison figure is as follows:

Figure 3-170 Quality tab page in the RF Result window — RSRP coverage
prediction figure
The RS SINR coverage prediction comparison figure is as follows:
Figure 3-171 Quality tab page in the RF Result window — RS SINR coverage
prediction figure
3.6.4 Exporting RF Planning Results

On the Cell Parameters tab page, you can export RF planning results. Click
Action. The Export button is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-172. Then,
click Export to display the dialog box for selecting the format to export RF
planning results, as shown in Figure 3-173.

Figure 3-172 Exporting RF planning results
Figure 3-173 Format for exporting RF planning results

3.6.5 Submitting RF Planning Results

On the Cell Parameters tab page, click Commit. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-174. Click OK to directly update optimization results to
NEs. The optimization results of the latest iteration are the best results.
Therefore, the optimization results of the latest iteration are submitted to NEs.
Figure 3-174 Dialog box displayed after clicking Commit
3.7 Capacity Simulation

Using the U-Net, you can view the actual network capacity from multiple
dimensions.
The following contents describe operations in the LTE-TDD network. The
operations in the LTE-FDD network are similar to those in the LTE-TDD
network. In the following contents, the operations in the LTE-FDD network
are the same as those in the LTE-TDD network unless otherwise specified.
3.7.1 Setting Capacity Simulation Parameters

To set capacity simulation parameters in parameter templates to be imported,
LTE-FDDCell.xls

Table 3-11 LTE-FDD cell parameters for capacity simulation
Transceiver Name Name of the transceiver to which a
cell belongs.
Cell Name Name of a cell.
Active Indicates whether to activate the
current cell.
Frequency Band Information about a frequency band.
Channel Index Channel index.
Max Power(dBm) Maximum transmit power.
Target Load(DL) Target load on the downlink. The
value of this parameter ranges from
0 to 1.
Target Load(UL) Target load on the uplink. The value
of this parameter ranges from 0 to 1.
Edge Frequency Style(UL) Method of allocating frequencies to
CEUs on the uplink. (This parameter
is mandatory when the ICIC function
is enabled.)
Edge Frequency Style(DL) Method of allocating frequencies to
CEUs on the downlink. (This
parameter is mandatory when the
ICIC function is enabled.)
ICIC(UL) Indicates whether to perform ICIC
on the uplink. (This parameter is
mandatory when the ICIC function is
enabled.)
ICIC(DL) Indicates whether to perform ICIC
on the downlink. (This parameter is
enabled.)
Frequency Selectivity Schedule(UL) Indicates whether to perform
frequency scheduling on the uplink.
Frequency Selectivity Schedule(DL) Indicates whether to perform
frequency scheduling on the
downlink.
Max Schedule Users(UL) Maximum number of scheduled
users on the uplink.
Max Schedule Users(DL) Maximum number of scheduled
users on the downlink.

Control Channel Overhead(UL)(RB) Number of RBs on the uplink
control channel.
Control Channel Number of OFDM symbols on the
Overhead(DL)(Symbol) downlink PDCCH.
PBCH to RS(dB) Offset of the PBCH power relative to
the reference signal power (unit:
dB).
SCH to RS(dB) Offset of the SCH power relative to
dB).
RS SINR Access SINR access threshold of the
Threshold(DL)(dB) downlink reference signal.
PB Index for the offset of the power of
category-A and category-B symbols
for data REs relative to the reference
signal RE power.
Schedule Policy Scheduling policy.
PA(dB) Offset of the PDCCH RE transmit
power relative to the reference signal
RE transmit power.
CCU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH
category-A symbols received by
CCUs relative to the reference signal
power. (This parameter is mandatory
when the ICIC function is enabled.)
CEU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH
CEUs relative to the reference signal
Alpha Open-loop power control parameter
indicating the coefficient for pass
loss compensation in a cell.
Po(dBm) Power parameter for open-loop
power control.
TTI Bundling Indicates whether to consider the
TTI bundling.
VMIMO Indicates whether to consider the
virtual MIMO (VMIMO).

PSIC Advanced receiver (AR) feature
introduced to U-Net V300R009 for
capacity simulation. This feature is
enabled only when the following
conditions are met:
 Two receive antennas are
installed on the base station.
 The VMIMO feature is enabled.
The uplink throughput for data
services is increased after this
feature is enabled.
PUSCH IRC Indicates whether to enable the
PUSCH interference rejection
combining (IRC) function.
For the PUSCH, the PUSCH IRC
the interference power of combined
signals and improves uplink gains.
default.
COMP Indicates whether to enable the
coordinated multi-point
transmission/reception technology
(CoMP) function.
You can enable the CoMP function
for the uplink in a base station,
thereby improving the cell edge
capacity and the average cell
Channel Relativity Indicates whether to consider the
channel correlation.
default.
Transmission Mode Transmission mode.
For details about the value of this
parameter, see Table 3-5.
LTE-TDDCell.xls

Table 3-12 LTE-TDD parameters for capacity simulation
Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver. This
parameter uniquely identifies a
transceiver.
Cell Name Name of the site to which a
transceiver belongs.
Active Indicates whether to activate the
current carrier.
Frequency Band Information about a frequency band.
Channel Index Channel index.
Max Power(dBm) Maximum transmit power (unit:
dBm).
Target Load(DL) Target load on the downlink.
Target Load(UL) Target load on the uplink.
Edge Frequency Style(UL) Method of allocating frequencies to
CEUs on the uplink. The Reuse3
status (Style1, Style2, or Style3) is
supported. (This parameter is
enabled.)

Edge Frequency Style(DL) Method of allocating frequencies to
CEUs on the downlink.
When ICIC(DL) is set to Static
When ICIC(DL) is set to Adaptive
Style2, or Style3), Reuse6 state
(Style1a, Style1b, Style2a, Style2b,
Style3a, or Style3b), full-power
Reuse1 state (AllPowerReuse1), and
(LowPowerReuse1) are supported.
When this parameter is set to the
Reuse3 or Reuse6 state, the value of
CCU PA is used as the cell centers
and the value of CEU PA is used as
the cell edges for all users in the cell.
AllPowerReuse1, the value of PA is
used as the PA values for all users in
the cell. When this parameter is set
to LowPowerReuse1, the value of
values for all users in the cell. (This
parameter is mandatory when the
ICIC function is enabled.)
ICIC(UL) Indicates whether to perform ICIC
on the downlink.
When the ICIC function is disabled,
the value of Actual IoT(UL)
specified in the cell attributes is used
across the cell.
When the ICIC function is enabled,
the value of CCU IoT is used at the
cell center and the value of CEU
IoT is used on the cell edge.

ICIC(DL) Indicates whether to perform ICIC
on the downlink.
When this parameter is set to ICIC
Off, the value of PA specified in the
cell attributes is used across the cell.
When this parameter is set to Static
ICIC, the ICIC function is enabled.
In this case, the value of CCU PA is
used at the cell center and the value
of CEU PA is used on the cell edge.
Adaptive ICIC, the ICIC function
can be automatically enabled and the
edge band mode can be
automatically configured. You can
plan edge band modes and then
deliver the band modes without
configuring this parameter for cells
one by one.
Frequency Selectivity Schedule(UL) Indicates whether to perform
frequency scheduling on the uplink.
Frequency Selectivity Schedule(DL) Indicates whether to perform
frequency scheduling on the
downlink.
Max Schedule Users(UL) Maximum number of scheduled
users on the uplink.
Max Schedule Users(DL) Maximum number of scheduled
users on the downlink.
Control Channel Overhead(UL)(RB) Number of RBs on the uplink
control channel.
Control Channel Number of OFDM symbols on the
Overhead(DL)(Symbol) downlink PDCCH.
PBCH to RS(dB) Offset of the PBCH power relative to
dB).
SCH to RS(dB) Offset of the SCH power relative to
dB).
RS SINR Access Threshold(DL)(dB) SINR access threshold of the
downlink reference signal.

PB Index for the offset of the power of
category-A and category-B symbols
for data REs to the reference signal
RE power.
Schedule Policy Scheduling policy.
PA(dB) Offset of the PDCCH RE transmit
power relative to the reference signal
RE transmit power.
CCU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH
CCUs relative to the reference signal
CEU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH
CEUs relative to the reference signal
Alpha Open-loop power control parameter
indicating the coefficient for pass
loss compensation in a cell.
Po(dBm) Power parameter for open-loop
power control.
TTI Bundling Indicates whether to consider the
TTI bundling.
Multi-user Beamforming Indicates whether to enable the
multi-user beamforming function
during downlink scheduling.
VMIMO Indicates whether to consider the
virtual MIMO (VMIMO).
PSIC Advanced receiver (AR) feature
introduced to U-Net V300R009 for
capacity simulation. This feature is
enabled only when the following
conditions are met:
 Two receive antennas are
installed on the base station.
 The VMIMO feature is enabled.
The uplink throughput for data
services is increased after this
feature is enabled.

PUSCH IRC Indicates whether to enable the
PUSCH interference rejection
combining (IRC) function.
For the PUSCH, the PUSCH IRC
the interference power of combined
signals and improves uplink gains.
default.
COMP Indicates whether to enable the
coordinated multi-point
transmission/reception technology
(CoMP) function.
You can enable the CoMP function
for the uplink in a base station,
thereby improving the cell edge
capacity and the average cell
Channel Relativity Indicates whether to consider the
channel correlation.
default.
Transmission Mode Transmission mode.
For details about the value of this
parameter, see Table 3-5.
----End
3.7.2 Creating a Simulation Group

Prerequisites
 Base stations and cells must have been available (mandatory).
 A traffic map must have been created (mandatory).
 The geographic data must have been imported (optional).
 The calculation area must have been created (optional).
Creating a calculation area refers to creating a polygon where contains the base
stations to be simulated.

Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab page. In the navigation tree,
choose Simulations.
Figure 3-175 Creating a simulation group (1)
Step 2 Right-click Simulations and choose New to display the Simulation Group
Properties window.

After the following parameters are set, click Apply or OK to create a

simulation group.
 Name: indicates the name of a traffic simulation group.
 Site Corr: indicates the shadow fading factor on the base station side.
 Number of Simulations: indicates the number of simulations. A larger
number of simulations indicates more precise simulation results but
requires longer calculation time.
 Number of Iterations: indicates the number of iterations. This
parameter is used for the SingleRan simulation. You do not need to pay
attention to this parameter.
 Calculate Now: indicates whether to perform simulation calculation
immediately.
 Select Traffic Maps to be Used: indicates a traffic map to be selected.

 Select Polygon: indicates a calculation area to be selected.

 Number of TTI: indicates the number of transmission time intervals

(TTIs). The U-Net adopts the semi-dynamic simulation to obtain the
instantaneous network information according toTTI. A shorter TTI
increases the precision of simulation results but requires longer
calculation period. Generally, the convergence speed of the LTE-FDD
network is quicker than that of the LTE-TDD network. Therefore, the
default value is 500 in the LTE-FDD network and is 1250 in the
LTE-TDD network.
 UL IoT Convergence Threshold: indicates the uplink IoT convergence
threshold, which is used for checking whether a network is converged.
 DL Throughput Convergence Threshold(%): indicates the downlink
throughput convergence threshold, which is used for checking whether a
network is converged.
 UL Throughput Convergence Threshold(%): indicates the uplink
throughput convergence threshold, which is used for checking whether a
network is converged.
 DL Load Convergence Threshold(%): indicates the downlink load
convergence threshold, which is used for checking whether a network is
converged.
 UL Load Convergence Threshold(%): indicates the uplink load
convergence threshold, which is used for checking whether a network is
converged.
----End

3.7.3 Running the Simulation Group

Figure 3-179 Running a simulation group (1)
Click Calculate to run a simulation group. You can right-click the simulation
group and choose Stop to stop the calculation.
Figure 3-180 Running a simulation group (2)

3.7.4 Viewing Capacity Simulation Results

After a simulation group is calculated, you can view the simulation results in
the statistics table, the map window, or the PDF or CDF diagram.
Viewing the Statistics Results of Capacity Simulation (on the Entire

Network)
You can view the capacity simulation statistics results on the entire network,
including the statistics information on the entire network, site statistics
information, and cell statistics information.
Figure 3-181 Viewing simulation results on the entire network (1)
On the interface of the LTE-FDD network, LTDTDD is LTE.
Parameters on the Statistics tab page are as follows:

 Request area
− Number of TTI: indicates the number of TTIs. The U-Net adopts the
semi-dynamic simulation to obtain the instantaneous network
information according toTTI. A shorter TTI increases the precision of
simulation results but requires longer calculation period.
− Average Users: indicates the average total number of users
attempting to gain access to the network. Average Throughput
Demand(DL): indicates the average required downlink throughput on
the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.
− Average Throughput Demand(UL): indicates the average required
uplink throughput on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.
− Users: indicates the number of users attempting to gain access to each
service.
− Uplink: indicates the number of uplink users attempting to gain
access to each service.
− Downlink: indicates the number of downlink users attempting to gain
access to each service.
− Max Throughput Demand(UL): indicates the maximum required
uplink throughput of each service on the entire network. The unit is
Mbit/s or kbit/s.
− Min Throughput Demand(UL): indicates the minimal required
Mbit/s or kbit/s.
− Average Throughput Demand(UL): indicates the average required
Mbit/s or kbit/s.

− Max Throughput Demand(DL): indicates the maximum required

downlink throughput of each service on the entire network. The unit
is Mbit/s or kbit/s.
− Min Throughput Demand(DL): indicates the minimal required
− Average Throughput Demand(DL): indicates the average required
 Results area
− Number of TTI: indicates the number of TTIs. The U-Net adopts the
semi-dynamic simulation to obtain the instantaneous network
information according toTTI. A shorter TTI increases the precision of
simulation results but requires longer calculation period. This
parameter is available only in the properties of a single snapshot.
− Stat Start Time: indicates the statistics start TTI. This parameter is
available only in the properties of a single snapshot.
− IsConvergence: indicates whether a snapshot is converged. This
parameter is available only in the properties of a single snapshot.
− Average Users: indicates the average total number and percentage of
users that actually gain access to the entire network.
− Actual MAC Throughput(UL): indicates the actual average
throughput at the uplink physical layer on the entire network. The
unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.
− Actual MAC Throughput Standard Deviation(UL): indicates the
actual standard deviation of the average throughput at the uplink
server layer on the entire network.
− Actual Application Throughput(UL): indicates the actual average
throughput at the uplink server layer on the entire network. The unit
− Actual Application Throughput Standard Deviation(UL):
indicates the actual standard deviation of the average throughput at
the uplink server layer on the entire network.
− Actual MAC Throughput(DL): indicates the actual average
throughput at the downlink physical layer on the entire network. The
− Actual MAC Throughput Standard Deviation(DL): indicates the
actual standard deviation of the average throughput at the downlink
server layer on the entire network.
− Actual Application Throughput(DL): indicates the actual average
throughput at the downlink server layer on the entire network. The
− Actual Application Throughput Standard Deviation(DL):
indicates the actual standard deviation of the average throughput at
the downlink server layer on the entire network.
− Service User: indicates the number and percentage of users that
successfully gain access to each service.
− Downlink: indicates the number of downlink users that gain access to
each service.
− Downlink Standard Deviation: indicates the standard deviation of

the downlink users that gain access to each service.
− Uplink: indicates the number of uplink users that gain access to each
service.
− Uplink Standard Deviation: indicates the standard deviation of the
uplink users that gain access to each service.
− Offline User: indicates the number and percentage of offline users
corresponding to each service.
− Failed User: indicates the number and percentage of failed users
corresponding to each service.
− Actual MAC Throughput(UL): indicates the actual uplink
throughput of each service on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s
or kbit/s.
− Actual MAC Throughput Standard Deviation(UL): indicates the
standard deviation of the actual uplink throughput of each service on
the entire network.
− Actual MAC Throughput(DL): indicates the actual downlink
throughput of each service on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s
or kbit/s.
− Actual MAC Throughput Standard Deviation(DL): indicates the
standard deviation of the actual downlink throughput of each service
on the entire network.
− Breakdown per unsuccessful reason: indicates the statistics of the
simulation users in unsuccessful state. This parameter is available
only in the properties of a single snapshot.
Parameters on the Sites(Average) tab page are as follows:

 Site: indicates the name of a site.

 Total MAC Throughput(UL)(kbps): indicates the total throughput at
the physical layer on the uplink of a site. The unit is kbit/s.
 Total Application Throughput(UL)(kbps): indicates the total
throughput at the server layer on the uplink of a site. The unit is kbit/s.
 Total MAC Throughput(DL)(kbps): indicates the total throughput at
the physical layer on the downlink of a site. The unit is kbit/s.
 Total Application Throughput(DL)(kbps): indicates the total
throughput at the server layer on the downlink of a site. The unit is kbit/s.
 LTEFTP(UL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of uplink users at the
physical layer corresponding to the FTP service.
 LTEFTP(UL Application)(kbps): indicates the number of uplink users
at the application layer corresponding to the FTP service.
 LTEFTP(DL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of downlink users at
the physical layer corresponding to the FTP service.
 LTEFTP(DL Application)(kbps): indicates the number of downlink
users at the application layer corresponding to the FTP service.
 LTEVoIP(UL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of downlink users at
the physical layer corresponding to the VoIP service.
 LTEVoIP(UL Application)(kbps): indicates the number of uplink users
at the application layer corresponding to the VoIP service.
 LTEVoIP(DL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of downlink users at
the physical layer corresponding to the VoIP service.
 LTEVoIP(DL Application)(kbps): indicates the number of downlink
users at the application layer corresponding to the VoIP service.
 LTEWebBrowsing(UL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of uplink
users at the physical layer corresponding to the Web browsing service.
 LTEWebBrowsing(UL Application)(kbps): indicates the number of
uplink users at the application layer corresponding to the Web browsing
service.
 LTEWebBrowsing(DL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of downlink
users at the physical layer corresponding to the VoIP service.
 LTEWebBrowsing(DL Application)(kbps): indicates the number of
downlink users at the application layer corresponding to the Web
browsing service.
 LTEVideoConferencing(UL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of
uplink users at the physical layer corresponding to the Video
Conferencing service.
 LTEVideoConferencing(UL Application)(kbps): indicates the number
of uplink users at the application layer corresponding to the Video
 LTEVideoConferencing(DL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of
downlink users at the physical layer corresponding to the Video

 LTEVideoConferencing(DL Application)(kbps): indicates the number

of downlink users at the application layer corresponding to the Video
Parameters on the Cells(Average) tab page are as follows:
 Site: indicates the name of a site.

 Transceiver: indicates the name of a transceiver.
 Cell: indicates the name of a transceiver.
 Tx Power(dBm): indicates the TX power. The unit is dBm.
 IoT(UL)(dB): indicates the ratio of the sum of interference noise to the
volume of increased noise at the uplink. The unit is dB.
 Load(UL): indicates the uplink load.
 Average Used RB(UL): indicates the number of uplink RBs in use.
 Load(DL): indicates the downlink load.
 Average Used RB(DL): indicates the number of downlink RBs in use.
 MAC Throughput(UL)(kbps): indicates the uplink average throughput
at the physical layer. The unit is kbit/s.
 Application Throughput(UL)(kbps): indicates the uplink average
throughput at the server layer. The unit is kbit/s.
 MAC Throughput(DL)(kbps): indicates the downlink average
throughput at the physical layer. The unit is kbit/s.
 Application Throughput(DL)(kbps): indicates the downlink average
throughput at the server layer. The unit is kbit/s.
 Service User: indicates the number of users that gain access to services.
 Offline User: indicates the number of users involved in call drops.
Viewing the Statistics Results of Capacity Simulation (of a Single

Snapshot)
You can view the statistics results of capacity simulation of a single snapshot,
including the statistics information about a single snapshot, site statistics
information, cell statistics information, and user statistics information.
Figure 3-185 Viewing simulation results of a snapshot (1)
Parameters on the Statistics tab page are as follows:
 Stat Start Time: indicates the statistics start TTI.

 IsConvergence: indicates whether a snapshot is converged.

 Other parameters: You can refer to the parameter description on the
Statistics tab page for viewing simulation results on the entire network.
Figure 3-187 shows parameters on the Site tab page.
Parameters: You can refer to the parameter description on the Sites (Average)
tab page for viewing simulation results on the entire network.
Figure 3-188 shows parameters on the Cells tab page.

Parameters: You can refer to the parameter description on the Cells (Average)
tab page for viewing simulation results on the entire network.
Figure 3-189 shows parameters on the Mobiles tab page.
 ID: indicates the ID of a user.

 X: indicates the x-coordinate on the map of a user.
 Y: indicates the y-coordinate on the map of a user.

 Group Name: indicates the name of a simulation group.
 SnapShot Name: indicates the name of a snapshot.
 User Profiles: indicates a user type.
 Service: indicates a service type.
 Terminal: indicates a terminal type.
 Connection State: indicates the connection status. There are five user
states: Satisfied, ULNoCover, DLNoCover, NoAccess, and OffLine.
 Best Server: indicates the best serving cell. After load control is
performed, the value of BestServer changes.
 Link Type: indicates the link type (uplink or downlink).
 Indoor: indicates whether the terminal is used indoors.
 Link Loss(UL)(dB): indicates the uplink link loss.
 Link Loss(DL)(dB): indicates the downlink link loss.
 RSRP(DL)(dBm): indicates the reference signal received power on the
downlink.
 IoT(DL)(dB): Indicates the downlink interference over thermal. The unit
is dB. Simulate the last measurement value.
 PDSCH MCS: indicates the downlink modulation coding scheme
(MCS).
 PUSCH MCS: indicates the uplink modulation coding scheme (MCS).
 MIMO Mode: indicates the MIMO type.
 Tx Power(dBm): indicates the transmit power of a terminal. The
downlink user is empty.
 PUSCH MAC Throughput(kbps): indicates the throughput at the
physical layer of the PUSCH channel. The unit is kbit/s.
 PDSCH MAC Throughput(kbps): indicates the throughput at the
physical layer of the PDSCH channel. The unit is kbit/s.
 PUSCH Application Throughput(kbps): indicates the throughput at the
application layer of the PUSCH channel. The unit is kbit/s.
 PDSCH Application Throughput(kbps): indicates the throughput at the
application layer of the PUSCH channel. The unit is kbit/s.
 Average Used RB Number: indicates the average number of used RBs.
 RS SINR(DL)(dB): indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio
(SINR) of the downlink reference signal. The unit is dB.
 PUSCH SINR(dB): indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio
(SINR) of the PUSCH channel. The unit is dB.
 PDSCH SINR(dB): indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio
(SINR) of the PDSCH channel. The unit is dB.
Viewing the Statistics Results of the Capacity Simulation (on the GIS
Map)
1. User Classification and Display Setting

 The U-Net classifies simulation users by user status, user type, mobility
type, service type, and terminal.
 The U-Net supports the displaying of different types of simulation users
in different shapes and colors on the map.
Figure 3-190 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (1)
By clicking the icons in the Color column, you can edit the GIS display mode
of users of each type. For example, click the circle on the first row. In the
displayed floating window, you can modify Symbol and Fore Color of users
whose status is Satisfied.

Field Type in the floating window corresponds to node types under Snapshot.
2. Add display modes to the Legend window.

Step 1 Add user types and display settings to the Legend window.
Step 2 Display the Legend window.

3. View multiple users on the GIS map.

For example, view users whose statuses are Satisfied and OffLine on the GIS
map.

4. View detailed information about a single user on the GIS map.

On the GIS map, double-click a user icon to display the window for the
detailed user information.

Layer: indicates the name of a simulation group/snapshot.

Other parameters: You can refer to the statistics results of a single snapshot
and parameter description on the Mobiles tab page.
----End

Viewing the Statistics Results of Capacity Simulation (in a PDF or

CDF Chart)
Figure 3-201 Viewing the statistics results of capacity simulation in a PDF or

CDF chart (1)

CDF chart (2)
 You can choose different studies from the Item column. The CDF/PDF
curve of the selected study is displayed on the right pane.

 You can set Figure Style to CDF or PDF. The figure on the right pane is
updated.
 By right-clicking the figure on the right pane, you can perform
operations such as Copy, Save Image As, Print, and Show Point
Values.
 By dragging the scroll bar, you can change the scale of the CDF/PDF
curve.
 By choosing Un-Zoom and Undo All Zoom/Pan, you can cancel the
changing of the scale of the CDF/PDF curve.
 By choosing Set Scale to Default, you can set the scale to the default
value.
 By clicking Export Data, you can export the detailed study values to a
file. Figure 3-203 shows the exporting of throughput at the application
layer of all users.

CDF chart (3)

 IOT(UL): indicates the IOT on the uplink, and is the average uplink
IOTs of all cells.
 IOT(DL): indicates the IOT on the downlink, and is the average
downlink IOTs of all users in all cells.
 Load(UL): indicates the uplink load, and is the average load of all cells.
 Load(DL): indicates the downlink load, and is the average load of all
cells.

 Cell MAC Throughput(UL): indicates the uplink throughput, and is the

average uplink throughput of all cells.
 Cell MAC Throughput(DL): indicates the downlink throughput, and is
the average downlink throughput of all cells.
 RS SINR(DL): indicates the SINR of the downlink reference signal, and
is the average RS SINR of all users in all cells.
 Geometry: indicates the average geometry of all users in all cells.
 User MAC Throughput(UL): indicates the average throughput at the
MAC layer on the uplink of all users in all cells.
 User MAC Throughput(DL): indicates the average throughput at the
MAC layer on the downlink of all users in all cells.
 User Application Throughput(UL): indicates the average throughput at
the application layer on the uplink of all users in all cells.
 User Application Throughput(DL): indicates the average throughput at
the application layer on the downlink of all users in all cells.
 User Service Time(UL): indicates the user service time on the uplink,
and is the average service time of all users in all cells.
 User Service Time(DL): indicates the user service time on the downlink,
and is the average service time of all users in all cells.
 User Actual Power: indicates the actual transmit power of a user,
comprising the transmit power of each user in each cell.
 Cell Actual Power: indicates the actual transmit power of a cell, and is
the average actual transmit power of all cells.
 PUSCH SINR: indicates the PUSCH SINR of a user, and is the average
PUSCH SINR of all users in all cells.
 PDSCH SINR: indicates the PDSCH SINR of a user, and is the average
PDSCH SINR of all users in all cells.
 Throughput: indicates the throughput trend of each TTI.
Viewing the Average Result of Multiple Network Systems of

Capacity Simulation
This function is helpful for the simulation in SingleRAN networks but is not
frequently used in LTE FDD networks and LTE TDD networks.

Figure 3-204 Viewing the average result of multiple network systems (1)
Figure 3-205 Viewing the average result of multiple network systems (2)
3.7.5 Submitting Capacity Simulation Results

After the capacity simulation is complete, you can submit capacity simulation
results to NEs. Therefore, the coverage prediction can use more accurate cell
transmit power, load, and interference to make the prediction results more
accurate.

Submitting the Average Result of Multiple Snapshots to NEs
Figure 3-206 Submitting the average result of multiple snapshots to NEs (1)
Click Commit Result. The information about each cell, such as the actual
transmit power, load and IOT, is submitted to NEs. After the information is
successfully submitted to NEs, the following dialog box is displayed:

Submitting the Result of a Single Snapshot to NEs
Figure 3-209 Submitting the result a single snapshot to NEs (1)
Click Commit Result. The information about each cell, such as the actual
transmit power, load and IOT, is submitted to NEs. After the information is
successfully submitted to NEs, the following dialog box is displayed:
The current result will be displayed by the latest submitting result.

3.7.6 Exporting Capacity Simulation Results

Exporting Capacity Simulation Results in Batches
The exported files contain the statistics information, average value of sites,
and average value of cells at the monte carlo level and the statistics
information, site studies, cell studies, and user studies at the snapshot level.
The interface format is the same as that as described in section "Viewing
Capacity Simulation Results."
Figure 3-212 Exporting simulation results in batches (1)

Click Export.

You can see the progress on the lower part of the U-Net. After the progress
reaches 100%, the following dialog box is displayed.
Figure 3-216 shows the statistics tab pages at the monte carlo level, such as
Statistic, Site, and Cell; the statistics tab pages at the snapshot level, such as
Snapshot0Statistic, Snapshot0_Site, Snapshot0_Cell, and
Snapshot0_Mobile.
Exporting Results of a Single Statistics Tab Page of a Simulation

Group
You can separately export results in the statistics tab pages of Sites(Average)
and Cells(Average) for statistics results of multiple snapshots in a simulation
group and results in the statistics tab pages of Sites, Cells, and Mobiles for
statistics results of a single snapshot in a simulation group. The following
contents take the Site(Average) tab page as an example and describe the
method to export the statistics results.
The exported results can be saved in a TXT, CSV, or XLS file.

Figure 3-217 Exporting a single statistics result of the simulation (1)
Choose Action > Display Column.

The Column Display dialog box provides three options, All, None, and
Close.
For example, you can select only Site in the Column Display dialog box and
click Close. The Group Result dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
3-220.
In the displayed Group Result box, only the Site column is displayed. Then,
click Action, and choose Export from the shortcut menu.

In the displayed Data Export dialog box, only Site is included in the Export
Fields area. Then, you can click Export to export the site information.
3.8 ASP
Site planning is the first step in a network planning during network
construction. Currently, most telecom operators in the world have deployed
GSM and UMTS networks. As the network technology gradually evolves into
WiMAX, TD-SCDMA, and LTE, telecom operators focus more on using
existing base station resources, reducing costs in network construction, and
improving network construction efficiency.
Telecom operators now cooperate with each other because certain operators
have insufficient spectrum resources. New requirements emerge during this
period in terms of 2G refarming to 3G, 2G network combining, and spectrum
resource sharing. In these scenarios, whether the sites in the reconstructed
networks can provide continuous coverage and absorb traffic is also a major
concern for telecom operators. The U-Net, a professional radio network
planning platform provided by Huawei, helps with site planning in network
deployment, expansion, and combination scenarios. The U-Net also assists
pre- and post-sales network planning personnel in making and verifying site
planning solutions.
3.8.1 ASP Application Scenarios

The U-Net provides the Accurate Site Planning (ASP) function. This function
enables the U-Net to select optimum sites for deployment from user-specified
sites based on network coverage and traffic objectives. If no candidate sites
are available, the U-Net provides advice about a new site location and site
configurations, and users determine whether to create the site. This function
determines new sites for LTE network construction (including network
combination) and live networks.
The following table describes function support degree in different scenarios.
Scenario Scenario Site Site Using Resolving Resolving

Description Selection Addition Existing Capacity Capacity
MR Problem Problem
Data
Network After operators √ √ √ √ √
deployment propose
coverage and
traffic
objectives, the
U-Net
automatically
provides
recommended
site locations
and
configurations.
Network Based on the √ √ √ √ √
expansion problematic
coverage areas
and
overloaded
areas, the
U-Net
automatically
provides
recommended
site locations
and
configurations.

Scenario Scenario Site Site Using Resolving Resolving

Description Selection Addition Existing Capacity Capacity
MR Problem Problem
Data
Network Based on the √ √ √ √ √
combination coverage and
traffic analysis
before network
combination,
the U-Net
automatically
provides
information
about the sites
to be reserved
and the
recommended
configurations.
Refarming Based on the √ √ √ √ √
coverage and
capacity
analysis for
GSM, UMTS,
and LTE
networks, the
U-Net
automatically
provides LTE
site locations
and
configurations
appropriate to
refarming.
3.8.2 Preparations for the Planning

Before performing ASP, you need to prepare data listed in this section. After
data preparation is complete, the U-Net sequentially sorts such data in
corresponding modules in LTE planning projects.
Electronic Map
Electronic map data is fundamental to ASP in the U-Net. Based on electronic
maps, the U-Net determines signal strength to calculate cells' signal coverage
range and traffic volumes to be absorbed.
The U-Net supports electronic maps in Planet, *.TAB, and *.mif formats. The
U-Net supports the following layers in ASP: clutter map (mandatory), altitude
map (mandatory), vector map (optional), and building height map (mandatory
if the Vocanno propagation model is used). For details about how to import

electronic maps in the U-Net, see section Error! Reference source not
found."Error! Reference source not found.."
Engineering Information
Engineering parameters include information, such as the locations, types,
frequencies, frequency bands, and cell parameters of all existing and
candidate sites, and therefore are the basic data for ASP. Before executing
LTE ASP, ensure that all engineering parameters for candidate sites are
imported to the U-Net.
The U-Net supports the import of engineering parameters in TXT, CSV, XLS,
and XLSX formats.
The engineering parameters contain the following information:
Site information: such as the site name and location (latitude and longitude)
Antenna information: such as the antenna azimuth, downtilt, type, and height
Cell information: such as the cell name, frequency band, RNC ID, and CI
The following attachments are engineering parameter templates for FDD LTE
and TDD LTE.
LTE Site Planning EngineeringParametersLTE-FDD.xlsx
LTE Site Planning

EngineeringParametersLTE-FDD.xls
LTE Site Planning EngineeringParametersLTE-TDD.xlsx
LTE Site Planning

EngineeringParametersLTE-TDD.xls
For details about how to import engineering parameters in the U-Net, see
section Error! Reference source not found."Error! Reference source not
found.."
MR Data
MR data is reported by the UE to the BSC/RNC during network operation.
You can enable MR data collection function on the BSC/RNC to obtain MR
data reported by all UEs at a specified period. Then, the Nastar locates and
analyzes MR data and converts it into the MR data that can be used for ASP in
the U-Net. With the MR data, the U-Net calibrates signal coverage for cells on
the live network to obtain more accurate coverage. The MR data also helps
analyze statistical information about cell traffic to provide traffic volumes on
each grid. Such information helps users analyze traffic volume that each site
and cell absorbs after ASP.
MR data is not required in certain scenarios: In network expansion scenarios,
the MR data of other vendors is unavailable; telecom operators do not require
high site planning accuracy; MR data cannot be collected in a project; and
MR data is unavailable because new networks are under construction. In these

scenarios, the U-Net uses propagation models to predict the coverage of
existing and new cells.
The U-Net supports the import of MR data in TXT, CSV, XLS, and XLSX
formats. The MR data exported from the Nastar is generally in CSV format.
The following table describes LTE MR data.
Parameter Meaning Type Value

Range
TAC TAC information of a cell, which is Text N/A
mandatory in MR data.
CI CI information of a cell, which is Text N/A
mandatory in MR data.
Longitude Longitude information in MR data. Floating N/A
point
number
Latitude Latitude information in MR data. Floating N/A
point
number
MRCount Number of MRs reported by a cell Integer N/A
within a specified period.
RSCP Average measurement level that a Floating N/A
cell receives within a specified point
period. number
RSRQ Signal RSRQ in the MR data that a Floating N/A
cell receives within a specified point
period. number
Grid Traffic Map

Data on the grid traffic map includes CS and PS traffic volumes on each
clutter grid. Based on clutter weights or MR data, the U-Net rasterizes
busy-hour cell traffic volumes obtained from the live network and then
obtains data for the grid traffic map. Data on a grid traffic map represents
traffic volumes on the entire network during ASP. The traffic will be absorbed
by existing and new cells on the network.
The U-Net provides two methods of creating a grid traffic map:
1、 Rasterizing clutter weights. In network deployment or when MR data is
unavailable, you can create a grid traffic map by rasterizing clutter
weights.
2、 Rasterizing MR data. In existing networks or when MR data is available,
you can create a grid traffic map by rasterizing MR data.

A grid traffic map is not required if the expected cell traffic volume is
unavailable or when the traffic absorption for the entire network is not taken
into consideration.
3.8.3 Creating an ASP Group

After planning preparations are made, you can create an ASP group to
implement automatic site planning. To create an ASP group, perform the
following steps:
Step 1 Click the Operation icon under Project Explorer in the U-Net main window.
Right-click LTE under ASP and choose New from the shortcut menu.
Figure 3-223 Creating an ASP group (1)
Step 2 Set mandatory parameters in the displayed dialog box and click OK.

Figure 3-224 Creating an ASP group (2)
3.8.4 Setting ASP Parameters

Right-click an LTE site planning project in the ASP navigation tree and
choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The parameter setting dialog box
is displayed.
This dialog box contains the General, Objective, Strategy, and Advanced
tab pages, allowing users to set parameters required for ASP.
General Tab Page

For details about the General tab page, see Figure 3-224.
The General tab page contains the computation area and basic data for setting
ASP. Computation areas and frequency bands specify the range for a site to be
planned. Basic data includes traffic map data, MR data, DT data, and coverage
complaint data, helping you obtain more accurate ASP results. Table 3-13 lists
the parameters on the General tab page.
Table 3-13 Parameters on the General tab page
Name Name of an ASP group.
After an ASP group is created, you can view its name
under the ASP > LTE node on the Operation page. The
U-Net provides a default name for each new ASP group.

Computation area A polygon drew by users in the U-Net. A larger
computation area requires longer computation time.
Therefore, it is recommended that the computation area be
set to a range within 20,000 square kilometers. When
Computation area is set to Full Map, the U-Net
calculates all activated site, which may lead to a
computation failure due to oversized range.
Resolution (m): Precision for calculating an ASP group.
The default value is 50.
Frequency Band Settings You can set the following parameters in the Frequency
Band Settings area:
 Frequency Band: available frequency bands
 Enable: whether the frequency bands are enabled
 Number of Sites: number of sites using a frequency
band
 Number of Carriers: number of all carriers under a
frequency band
Data Source Data source used for site planning.
Traffic map Whether traffic map data is used.
If you select this check box, you can select a traffic map
from the drop-down list box. The U-Net analyzes the
traffic weight in each grid, evaluates the traffic volume for
each cell, and determines whether some cells are
overloaded using the selected grid-based traffic map data
during ASP.
Measurement report data Whether MR data is used.
If you select this check box, you can select MR data from
the drop-down list box. MR data is used to calibrate link
loss data.
Drive test data Whether DT data is used.
If you select this check box, you can select DT data from
the drop-down list box. DT data is used to calibrate link
loss data.
MR/DT Conversion Rules for converting MR and DT data.
The U-Net allows users to set rules for converting MR and
DT data of different frequency bands. When users have
MR and DT data of live GSM and UMTS networks, users
can set inter-RAT and inter-frequency-band conversion
rules so that the U-Net converts such data into MR and
DT data used for LTE ASP. With the converted data, the
U-Net provides users with network coverage information.
When you click MR/DT Conversion, the dialog box
shown in Figure 3-225 is displayed. For details about the
parameters in this dialog box, see Table 3-14.
User complaint data Whether user complaint data is used.
If you select this check box, you can click Browse to
import user complaint data in TXT, CSV, XLS, or XLSX
format. You can also click Get Template to obtain a user
complaint data template in Excel format.
VIP user data Whether VIP user data is used.
If you select this check box, you can click Browse to
import VIP user data in TXT, CSV, XLS, or XLSX
format. You can also click Get Template to obtain a VIP
user data template in Excel format.
Set Prediction Parameters Coverage prediction parameters.
When you click Set Prediction Parameters, the dialog
box shown in Figure 3-226 is displayed, allowing you to
set parameters used for coverage prediction in ASP.
Figure 3-225 Frequency Band Convert Setting dialog box
Table 3-14 lists the parameters in the Frequency Band Convert Setting
dialog box.
Table 3-14 Parameters in the Frequency Band Convert Setting dialog box
Polygon Range that a conversion rule applies

Source Layer Source layer for a conversion rule
Target Layer Target layer for a conversion rule
Offset(dB) Offset for a conversion rule
Currently, the MR and DT data conversion rules are recommended for high frequency
bands. This is because the calculation results for MR and DT data conversion are not
accurate for low frequency bands.
Figure 3-226 Prediction Parameters dialog box
Table 3-15 lists the parameters in the Prediction Parameters dialog box.
Table 3-15 Parameters in the Prediction Parameters dialog box
Minimum RSRP (dBm) Minimum valid level for coverage prediction.
A signal level lower than the value of this parameter is
regarded as invalid and will be discarded.
With shadow Whether shadow fading is considered.
After this parameter is selected and Cell edge coverage
probability is set, the U-Net automatically calculates the
shadow fading margin and preserves the obtained shadow
fading margin in the signal propagation loss to reduce the
impact of shadow fading on signal levels.
Cell edge coverage Probability of cell edge coverage.
probability (%): A greater cell edge coverage probability indicates a
greater shadow fading margin and a smaller cell coverage.
The shadow fading margin is 0 when the cell edge
coverage percentage is 50%. You are advised to set this
value to 75.0.
Terminal Terminal type selected by a user.
Service Service type selected by a user.
Mobility Mobility type selected by a user.
Indoor coverage Whether indoor coverage is considered.
When this parameter is selected, the U-Net preserves the
penetration loss specified for each clutter type in the
corresponding signal propagation loss anywhere when the
transceiver is deployed indoors.
Interference Reception Threshold for minimum interference receive level.
Threshold (dBm)
Neighbour PDSCH Load (%) The percentage of PDSCH load for a neighboring cell.
When this check box is selected, the U-Net considers the
load of neighboring cells while calculating SINR.
Calculate now Whether ASP is executed immediately after you click
OK.
Objective Tab Page

On the Objective tab page, you can set a coverage objective for ASP, whether
to solve coverage and capacity problems, define weak-coverage grids, and set
capacity expansion parameters.

Figure 3-227 Objective tab page
Table 3-16 lists the parameters on the Objective tab page.
Table 3-16 Parameters on the Objective tab page
Resolve poor coverage Whether to resolve weak-coverage problems.
If this parameter is selected, you can select and add sites
based on coverage.
RSRP threshold (dBm) Threshold for downlink signal level.
Signal level lower than the threshold is regarded as weak
coverage.
Target coverage ratio (%) Target coverage percentage.
The default value is 100.
Focus areas A focused area.
All areas calculated during ASP are regarded as focused
areas, excluding certain intersecting areas. You can
differentiate focused areas by setting different coverage
level thresholds and coverage objective percentages.
Polygon Name of the polygon specifying a focused area.
Used Whether a target coverage percentage is set and used for
optimizing a focused area.
RSRP Threshold(dBm) Minimum coverage signal level threshold within a focused
area.
An area whose signal level is higher than the threshold is
not regarded as a weak coverage area.
Target Coverage (%) Percentage of the area whose signal level reaches the
specified signal level threshold in the focused area.
The target coverage is achieved only when the coverage
percentage in the focused area reaches the value of this
parameter.
Resolve capacity overload Whether to resolve capacity overload.
If this parameter is selected, you can select and add sites
based on capacity during site planning. This does not
apply to LTE networks.
Expansion Settings Setting of the expansion parameter.
Frequency Band Frequency band to which the cell to be expanded belongs.
Expansion Whether to perform expansion.
Max Carrier Number per Maximum number of carriers allowed to be expanded in a
Sector sector.
Resolve low service rate Whether to calculate user experience rate.
coverage When this check box is selected, the Service Rate
Settings area take effect, and the rate of each site can be
displayed on the GIS map after ASP.
Low service rate threshold Threshold for a low service rate.
Strategy Tab Page

You can set site addition modes on the Strategy tab page, including
specifying the maximum number of sites, whether macro and micro sites are
allowed, macro and micro site templates, and candidate sites.

Figure 3-228 Strategy tab page
Table 3-17 lists the parameters on the Objective tab page.
Table 3-17 Parameters on the Objective tab page
Max site number Maximum number of sites.
The ASP is stopped when the number of active and new
sites exceeds the value of this parameter.
Allow macro site addition Whether macro sites can be added and whether a macro
site template can be selected.
After you select this check box, the U-Net uses a template
to create a macro site to predict coverage and determine
traffic absorption. For details, see section 2.4.11 Site
Template Configuration.
Allow micro site addition Whether micro sites can be added and whether a micro
site template can be selected.
After you select this check box, the U-Net uses a template
to create a micro site, which absorbs all traffic within the
coverage radius of 150 m. For details, see section 2.4.11
Site Template Configuration.
Allow Site Selection Whether sites can be selected from candidate sites.
After you select this check box, you can click Import site
status to import the Locked or Excluded status
information about all candidate sites.
Candidate Site Existing LTE site in the U-Net, which can serve as
candidate sites.
For details about the parameters in this area, see Table
3-18.
Figure 3-229 Site Value Items Setting dialog box

Figure 3-230 Clutter Constraint dialog box
Table 3-18 lists the parameters in the Candidate Sites area.
Table 3-18 Parameters in the Candidate Sites area
Parameter Description Default Value Value Range

Site Name Name of a site. N/A This parameter
A site is displayed only when the cannot be
site is available in the engineering modified.
parameters and Used is set to
True in the Setting table.
Frequency Frequency band information about N/A This parameter
Band a site. cannot be
If a site includes cells of different modified.
frequency bands, all the frequency
band names are displayed.

Parameter Description Default Value Value Range

Original Original status of a site, which N/A N/A
Status means whether the site is an
existing or candidate site.
This parameter takes effect when
Allow Site Selection is selected.
Locked Whether a site is locked. The status of all True/False
If a site is locked, it will be used sites in the
as an existing site on the network Active state is
during the site planning. set to Locked by
default.
Excluded Whether a site is excluded. False True/False
If a site is excluded, it will not be
used for site planning.
Site Type Type of a site: macro or micro N/A This parameter
site. cannot be
modified.
Site Priority Site priority. By default, this 0-100
This parameter can be set after option is
Enable in the Site Value Items selected.
Setting dialog box is selected.
Site Cost Score of the site cost. By default, this 0-100
This parameter can be set after option is
Enable in the Site Value Items selected.
User Define 1 Score of user-defined dimension By default, this 0-100
1. option is cleared.
This parameter can be set after
Enable in the Site Value Items
Comments Site comments. N/A This parameter
cannot be
modified.

You can filter sites to be locked according to Site Type and Comments of
candidate cells. Then, you can edit Locked or Excluded status information
about the sites. Site Type and Comments indicate the site type and comments
of sites in imported engineering parameters. In ASP for network deployment
and combination, it is recommended that you use the existing sites of
operators as candidate sites. In existing network scenarios, you must set
Locked status information of existing networks to True, which means that
you select sites for network expansion based on the sites on the existing
network.
Advanced Tab Page
Figure 3-231 Advanced tab page
Table 3-19 lists the parameters on the Advanced tab page.
Table 3-19 Parameters on the Advanced tab page

Signal level gap of active Threshold for offloading traffic.
set(db) When there are multiple cells in a site, this parameter
specifies the level difference between the cell and primary
serving cell, within which the cell offloads traffic. This
parameter is set to 4 db by default.
Revenue of CS per erlang Revenue of CS traffic per erlang.
This parameter calculates CS revenues of each site, which
affects site selection priority.
Revenue of PS per Kbytes Revenue of PS traffic per KBytes.
This parameter calculates PS revenues of each site, which
affects site selection priority.
Customized weight Whether to customize weights.
Max antenna downtilt Maximum antenna downtilt angle of a new site.
Max antenna height (m) Maximum antenna height of a new site.
Max split width(m) Maximum width for dividing areas for adding sites based
on coverage.
Minimum azimuth interval Minimum included angle for the azimuth of a new site.
Minimum ISD of macro Minimum distance between macro sites.
site(m) The U-Net stops adding macro sites for improving the
weak coverage in an area if the side length of the area is
smaller than the value of this parameter.
Minimum ISD of micro Minimum distance between micro sites.
site(m) No micro base stations are allowed to be added to a grid
when other base stations are available within the specified
distance to the grid.
RSRP threshold for micro Signal level threshold for adding a micro site.
sites(dBm) No micro sites are allowed to be added to a grid when the
signal level in the grid exceeds the value of this parameter.
3.8.5 Executing ASP

After an ASP group is created, the group is displayed in the corresponding
project navigation tree, as shown in Figure 3-232.

Figure 3-232 New ASP group in the project navigation tree
To execute ASP, right-click the new ASP group and choose Calculate from
the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-233.
Figure 3-233 Choosing Calculate
The U-Net then displays the calculation progress, as shown in Figure 3-234.

Figure 3-234 Calculation progress
After the calculation is complete, the U-Net prints information about site
planning in the Event Viewer dialog box, as shown in 0.
Figure 3-235 Event Viewer dialog box

3.8.6 Stopping ASP

To stop a running ASP, right-click the ASP group and choose Stop from the
shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-236.
Figure 3-236 Stopping ASP
After ASP is stopped, the related logs are displayed in the Event Viewer
dialog box, as shown in Figure 3-237.
Figure 3-237 Logs in the Event Viewer dialog box
After ASP is stopped, the U-Net does not provide calculation results of this
time. However, the calculation results of the last time are not deleted.

3.8.7 Viewing ASP Results

After ASP is complete, the ASP results are displayed in the U-Net, as shown
in 0. If the result table is closed, you can right-click the planning task and
choose Open Result from the shortcut menu to view the results.
Figure 3-238 Viewing ASP results
Error! Reference source not found. shows the ASP results.
Figure 3-239 ASP results

Statistic Tab Page

The Statistic tab page displays statistics about the coverage objectives,
capacity objectives, number of added sites, and number of selected sites on
the entire network. You can click Export to export all site planning statistics
to an Excel file.
Table 3-20 lists the parameters on the Statistic tab page.
Table 3-20 Parameters on the Statistic tab page
Duration Duration for ASP, which is displayed in the format of
hh:mm:ss. You can obtain the overall time information
about ASP.
Coverage Statistic Coverage statistics.
The Coverage Statistic area displays the coverage
information about each area based on coverage counters.
Coverage counters include coverage objective, original
coverage status, and final coverage status.
For details about these counters, see Table 3-21.
Capacity Statistic Capacity statistics.

The U-Net calculates the traffic volume absorbed by each
site when a traffic map is selected during ASP, and
collects statistics about the traffic volume absorbed by
each site after ASP.
Site Number Statistic Number of sites.
The Site Number Statistic area displays the number of
macro sites, number of micro sites, number of cells, and
number of carriers before and after the ASP. This helps
learn the overall ASP results.
Figure 3-240 shows the Coverage Statistic area.

Figure 3-240 Coverage Statistic area
0 describes counters in the Coverage Statistic area.
Table 3-21 Counters in the Coverage Statistic area
RSRP Threshold(dBm) Weakest signal level.
Grids where levels are lower than this threshold are
regarded as low-coverage grids.
Target coverage ratio(%) Target coverage percentage.
You can set different target coverage percentage for
different areas.
Original coverage(%) Initial coverage percentage.
If candidate sites can be selected, Original coverage (%)
indicates the coverage percentage of all sites for which
Locked is selected. If sites cannot be selected, Original
coverage (%) indicates the coverage percentage of all
sites whose status is Active.
Final coverage(%) Final coverage percentage.
If candidate sites can be selected, Final coverage (%)
indicates the coverage percentage of sites for which
Locked is selected, selected sites, and new macro and
micro sites after the ASP. If candidate sites cannot be
selected, Final coverage (%) indicates the coverage
percentage of sites whose status is Active and new macro
and micro sites after the ASP.
Improvement(%) Improvement percentage.
This parameter indicates coverage improvement
percentage of each area after the ASP.
Improvement area(km2) Improvement area.
This parameter indicates the coverage improvement area
of each area after the ASP, with the unit of square
kilometers.
Result Whether the ASP results achieve the coverage objective.
Success means that the coverage objective is achieved.
Failed means that the coverage objective is not achieved.
Figure 3-241 shows the Capacity Statistic area.
Figure 3-241 Capacity Statistic area
Table 3-22 describes counters in the Capacity Statistic area.
Table 3-22 Counters in the Capacity Statistic area

Total PS traffic PS traffic volume on a selected traffic map, in the unit of
volume(KBytes) KBytes.
Original PS traffic Volume of PS traffic absorbed by existing sites before
volume(KBytes): ASP.
Original traffic volume(%) Percentage of the volume of traffic absorbed by existing
sites before ASP to the total traffic volume on a traffic
map.
Final PS traffic Volume of PS traffic absorbed by all selected and new
volume(KBytes) sites after ASP.
Final traffic volume(%) Percentage of the volume of traffic absorbed by selected
and new sites after ASP to the total traffic volume on a
traffic map.
Improvement(%) Improvement proportion of the volume of traffic that can
be absorbed by sites on the live network after the ASP.
Figure 3-242 shows the Site Number Statistic area.

Figure 3-242 Site Number Statistic area
Table 3-23 describes counters in the Site Number Statistic area.
Table 3-23 Counters in the Site Number Statistic area
Original number Number of sites, cells, and carriers in each area before the
ASP.
Added macro number Number of macro sites, cells, and carriers selected or
created during the ASP.
Added micro number Number of micro sites, cells, and carriers selected or
created during the ASP.
Final number Number of sites, cells, and carriers in each area after the
ASP.
Site Tab Page

The Site tab page displays comparison results of coverage, traffic volume, and
TRX configurations of each site (including candidate and new sites) before
and after the ASP. This tab page also displays the frequency band and type of
each site, and reason why the site is displayed in the ASP results. Information
on this tab page helps users analyze ASP results by site.
By clicking a row title on the Site tab page, you can quickly locate the site on
the map, check the actual geographic location and surrounding environment
of the site, and analyze the relationship between this site and adjacent sites.
By right-clicking any area on the Site tab page and choosing the related item
from the shortcut menu, you can select columns you want to display. By
clicking a column header, you can freeze, hide, or unfreeze the column.
Figure 3-243 Shortcut menu

Figure 3-244 Site tab page
The Site tab page contains statistics on added sites and selected sites. Table
3-24 describes parameters on the Site tab page.
Table 3-24 Parameters on the Site tab page
Parameter Name Description

Site Name Name of a site.
Longitude Longitude of a site.
Latitude Latitude of a site.
Frequency Band Frequency bands for all sectors at a
site. If sectors at a site belong to
multiple frequency bands, names of
multiple frequency bands will be
displayed in this column, for
example, 2110 FDD - 1.4 MHz;
2110 FDD - 10 MHz.
Original Status Original status of a site. This
parameter indicates whether the site
is an existing site or a candidate
site.
Final Status Final status of a site. Values:
Excluded by user, Unselected, No
change, Locked by user,
Expansion, Selected by coverage,
Selected by capacity, Selected by
service rate, Added by coverage,
Added by capacity, and Added by
service rate
SiteType Type of a site.
 Macro: indicates a macro site.
 Micro: indicates a micro site.


Original Coverage Area(km2) Size of the area covered by all
sectors at a site before the ASP
(unit: square kilometer). If a site is
unavailable on the live network
before the ASP, or Locked for the
site is not selected, the site does not
have coverage area.
Final Coverage Area(km2) Size of the area covered by all
sectors at a site after the ASP (unit:
square kilometer). After the ASP,
the U-Net will analyze the coverage
of all existing sites on the live
network, locked sites, selected sites,
and new sites and display their
coverage area.
Poor Coverage Ratio(%) Percentage of the weak coverage
area to the total coverage area of a
site after site planning. A larger
value indicates weaker site
coverage. In this case, you need to
optimize site parameters or add
sites.
Original PS Traffic Volume(KBytes) Volume of PS traffic absorbed by
all sectors at a site before the ASP.
Final PS Traffic Volume(KBytes) Volume of PS traffic absorbed by
all sectors at a site after the ASP.
Transceiver Tab Page

The Transceiver tab page displays comparison results of coverage, traffic
volume, and TRX configurations of each transceiver before and after the ASP.
This tab page also displays the frequency band and type of each transceiver,
and reason why the transceiver is displayed in the ASP results. Information on
this tab page helps users analyze ASP results by sector.
By clicking a row title on the Transceiver tab page, you can quickly locate
the sector on the map, check the actual geographic location and surrounding
environment of the transceiver, and analyze the relationship between this
transceiver and surrounding transceivers.
By right-clicking any area on the Transceiver tab page and choosing the
related item from the shortcut menu, you can select columns you want to
display. By clicking a column header, you can freeze, hide, or unfreeze the
column.

Figure 3-246 Transceiver tab page
Table 3-25 describes parameters on the Transceiver tab page.
Table 3-25 Parameters on the Transceiver tab page

Site Name Name of the site to which a
transceiver belongs.
Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver.
Cell Name Name of a cell under a transceiver.
If a transceiver contains multiple
cells, names of multiple cells will
be displayed in this column.
Frequency Band Frequency band to which a cell
belongs under a transceiver. If the
cell under a transceiver belongs to
multiple frequency bands, names of
all frequency bands will be
displayed in this column.
site.


service rate
Original Coverage Area(km2) Size of the area covered by all cells
under a transceiver before the ASP
(unit: square kilometer). If a
transceiver has not been activated
before the ASP, the transceiver does
not have coverage area.
Final Coverage Area(km2) Size of the area covered by all cells
under a transceiver after the ASP
(unit: square kilometer). After the
ASP, the U-Net will analyze the
coverage of all existing sites on the
live network, locked sites, selected
sites, and new sites under a
transceiver and display their
coverage area.
Poor Coverage Ratio(%) Percentage of the weak coverage
area to the total coverage area of a
site after the ASP. A larger value
indicates weaker site coverage. In
this case, you need to optimize site
parameters or add sites.
Original PS Traffic Volume(KBytes) Volume of PS traffic absorbed by
all sectors at a site before the ASP.
Final PS Traffic Volume(KBytes) Volume of PS traffic absorbed by
all sectors at a site after the ASP.
Antenna Type Type of an antenna.
Azimuth Azimuth of an antenna.
Height Height of an antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt Mechanical downtilt of an antenna.
Electrical Downtilt Electrical downtilt of an antenna.
Traffic Absorption Tab Page

The Traffic Absorption tab page displays cell traffic absorption relationships.
The area in the left pane of the Traffic Absorption tab page displays all
active transceivers and the reasons why they are displayed in the planning
results after the ASP. The table in the right pane displays the site and sector
traffic absorbed by the selected transceiver before the ASP.
Figure 3-247 Traffic Absorption tab page
Table 3-26 describes parameters on the Traffic Absorption tab page.
Table 3-26 Parameters on the Traffic Absorption tab page

Related Cell Name of a related cell. This list
displays all cells that have traffic
absorption relationships with the
cells selected in the left pane.
site.
service rate
PS Traffic Volume(KBytes) PS traffic volume. Volume of PS
traffic of the selected cell in the left
pane, which is absorbed by the cell
in the same row in the right pane.
Changes Tab Page

The Changes tab page displays the names and scores of all selected and new
sites during the ASP. You can change the weight of each dimension to update
site scores and sort the scores. Then, you can determine which sites to be used
in the ASP results.
By right-clicking any area on the Changes tab page and choosing the related
item from the shortcut menu, you can select columns you want to display. By
clicking a column header, you can freeze, hide, or unfreeze the column.
Figure 3-249 Changes tab page
Table 3-27 describes parameters on the Changes tab page.
Table 3-27 Parameters on the Changes tab page


Site Type Type of a site.
 Macro: indicates a macro site.
 Micro: indicates a micro site.
Cause Reason why a site is displayed in the
planning results. The meaning of this
parameter is the same as the Reason
parameter on the Site tab page.


Coverage Score Coverage score of a site. The
coverage score of a site is calculated
based on the percentage of the
coverage area of the site to the
maximum coverage area of all sites.
The centesimal system is used to
score. Assume that the maximum
coverage area of all sites is Cmax and
the coverage area of a current site is
Ccurr. The formula specified in the
default score rule is as follows: Rcurr
= Ccurr/Cmax x 100.
Traffic Score Traffic score of a site. The traffic
score of a site is calculated based on
the percentage of the volume of
traffic absorbed by the site to the
maximum traffic volume of all sites.
The method of calculating the traffic
score is the same as that of
calculating the coverage score. A
larger score indicates a higher
priority.
Service Rate Score Score for service rate. The service
rate score simulates the user
experience rate by site. A larger score
indicates a higher rate on the site.
Total Score The total score is calculated based on
the score and weight of each
dimension. A higher total score
indicates a higher site priority. A site
with a high priority is recommended.
Enable Whether to enable a site. If this
parameter is selected, the site status
in the engineering parameters of the
U-Net is updated when the ASP
results are submitted. If this
parameter is not selected, the site
status is not submitted.
Clutter Tab Page

The Clutter tab page displays the final statistical results of each clutter type.
You can check the statistical counters of each clutter type in the entire
calculation area, including the clutter area, weak coverage proportion, total
traffic volume, and volume of absorbed traffic.

Figure 3-250 Clutter tab page
Table 3-28 describes parameters on the Clutter tab page.
Table 3-28 Parameters on the Clutter tab page

Coverage Area(km2) Coverage area of a clutter in the
entire calculation area.
Poor Coverage Ratio(%) Ratio of the weak coverage area to
the total coverage area of a clutter
in the entire calculation area.
PS Traffic Volume(KBytes) PS traffic volume of a clutter in the
entire calculation area (unit:
Kbytes).
Absorbed Traffic Volume(Erlang) Volume of absorbed traffic of a
clutter in the entire calculation area
(unit: Erlang).
Setting the Score and Weight of Each Dimension

You can set the score and weight of each dimension to affect the total score of
a site. On the Changes tab page, click Score Setting. The Score Setting
dialog box is displayed.

Figure 3-251 Score Setting dialog box
If you do not select Use corresponding to an item, the item is not considered
when the U-Net calculates the score of the site.
After you set the weight of each dimension, click OK. Then, the U-Net will
recalculate the total scores and priorities of all sites on the Changes tab page.
Remarks: You can filter and sort results displayed in all tables. When sorting
results, you can double-click the table header. When filtering results, you can
click a triangle symbol in the table header. Then, the filter items are displayed
and you can select items you want to filter, as shown in Figure 3-252.
Figure 3-252 Filter items

3.8.8 Displaying ASP Results on the Map

Checking ASP Results Represented both in a Table and on a Map
The U-Net can display ASP results on the map. Before using the geographical
display function, you must select Show Planning Result, as shown in Figure
3-253.
Figure 3-253 Show Planning Result menu
On the Site or Transceiver tab page, click the row header. The site or
transceiver is displayed in blue in the middle of the map window.
Figure 3-254 Window in which the table and map of the site are associated

Figure 3-255 Window in which the table and map of the transceiver are
associated
The map window corresponding to the Traffic Absorption tab page displays
the selected transceiver and other transceivers that have traffic absorption
relationships with the transceiver in different colors. In addition, the map
window uses lines and arrows to indicate traffic absorption directions.
Figure 3-256 Geographical display of traffic absorption

Setting Parameters for Geographical Display

Right-click LTE Site Planning 1 and choose Display Setting from the
shortcut menu. The Display Setting dialog box is displayed.
Figure 3-257 Display Setting menu
The Display Setting dialog box contains three tab pages: Symbols, Traffic
Relation, and Cell Coverage. On the Symbols tab page, you can set styles
and colors of new sites. On the Traffic Relation tab page, you can set colors
for cells that have traffic absorption relationships. On the Cell Coverage tab
page, you can set the coverage scope and level of each cell.

Figure 3-258 Symbols tab page
In the New Site Style area of the Symbols tab page, you can set the display
styles for new macro and micro sites, including the size and symbol. In the
Transceiver Color area, you can set different colors for transceivers with
different reasons.

Figure 3-259 Traffic Relation tab page
Display cell traffic absorption: indicates whether to display cell traffic

absorption relationships. If you select it, all cells that have traffic absorption
relationships with the cell in the left pane of the table and all lines are
displayed on the GIS map in the selected color.
The color of related cell: sets colors for cells that have traffic absorption
relationships. The default color is green.

Figure 3-260 Cell Coverage tab page
Display the cell coverage area: indicates whether to display cell coverage
areas. You can set the legends for the coverage range display in the table of
the Cell Coverage tab page. If you select Display the cell coverage area, the
coverage range of the cell selected in the left pane of the Traffic Absorption
tab page will be displayed on the GIS map.
Comparing and Analyzing Coverage Counters

You can right-click LTE Site Planning 1 and choose Coverage Map from
the shortcut menu. The Study Types dialog box with layer items are displayed,

Figure 3-261 Coverage Map menu
Figure 3-262 Study Types dialog box

Table 3-29 describes parameters in the Study Types dialog box.
Table 3-29 Parameters in the Study Types dialog box
Original RSRP Downlink RSRP coverage layer on

the entire network before the ASP.
Final RSRP Downlink RSRP coverage layer on
the entire network after the ASP.
RSRP Gain Gain layer after the downlink RSRP
coverage planning on the entire
network.
Original SINR Downlink SINR coverage layer on
Final SINR Downlink SINR coverage layer on
SINR Gain Gain layer after the downlink SINR
coverage planning on the entire
network.
Original Service Rate Average service rate of each user
before the ASP.
Final Service Rate Average service rate of each user
after the ASP.
Service Rate Variation Gain after the service rate of each
user is planned.
Original Best Server Distribution of best serving cells on
Final Best Server Distribution of best serving cells on
Best Server Variation Change in distribution of best serving
cells on the entire network before and
after the ASP.
In the Study Types dialog box, select layers you want to display and click
OK. Then, the selected layers are displayed in the corresponding ASP groups
and on the GIS map, as shown in Figure 3-263. You can deselect a layer in the
Study Types dialog box if you do not want to display it on the GIS map.

Figure 3-263 Coverage layers on the GIS map
3.9 ACP
The U-Net provides the automatic cell planning (ACP) function. This function
is used to automatically plan cell parameters (including power, antenna
azimuth, mechanical downtilt, electrical downtilt, and height) based on initial
cell status as well as user-specified areas and allowed cell adjustment range.
This function determines cell parameters for network deployment (including
network combination) and live networks.
3.9.1 ACP Parameter Preparations

Setting ACP parameters to be imported into parameter templates
For details about how to set site parameters, see Table 3-1.
For details about how to set transceiver parameters, see Table 3-2.
LTE-FDDCell.xls
Table 3-30 LTE-FDD cell parameters

*Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver, which
uniquely identifies a transceiver.
*Active Whether to activate the current
carrier.
*Frequency Band Frequency band information.
*Max Power(dBm) Maximum transmit power.
*RS Power(dBm) Power of a reference signal on a
subcarrier. Unit: dBm.
*PDSCH Actual Load(DL) Actual downlink load.
The value range is [0,1].
*Scene Scenario in which a cell is deployed.
* indicates a mandatory parameter.
LTE-TDD cell parameters are the same as LTE-FDD cell parameters. For
details, see LTE-FDD cell parameters.
3.9.2 Creating an ACP Group

The U-Net allows you to create ACP groups. The U-Net can automatically
plan cells based on ACP groups.
Prerequisites
 You have imported geographic data.
 You have imported or created base station information, including site,
transceiver, and cell information.
 You have created computation ares. For basic knowledge about
computation areas and methods for creating computation areas, see
methods for creating vector objects.

Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the browser window.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, select ACP.
Step 3 Right-click ACP and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure
3-264.
Figure 3-264 New Automatic Cell Planning Group
Step 4 In the displayed Group X dialog box, set parameters. For detailed parameter
description, see Parameter Description: Creating an ACP Group.
1. Click the General tab and set basic ACP parameters. For detailed
parameter description, see General Tab.
2. Click the Optimization Objectives tab and set an optimization area and
its weight. For detailed parameter description, see Optimization
Objectives Tab.
Click Area Setting in the navigation tree and set optimization area
parameters in the right pane.
Click Objectives in the navigation tree and view information about all
optimization objects in the right pane.
Right-click Objectives and choose New from the shortcut menu to create
an optimization object, as shown in Figure 3-265.
Figure 3-265 New Optimization Objectives

Set optimization object parameters in the right pane.
Set an optimization area before creating an optimization object.

3. Click the Optimization Configuration tab and set optimization
configuration parameters. For detailed parameter description, see
Optimization Configuration Tab.
In the RF Parameter Settings area, set policies for setting optimization
configuration parameters.
Click Port Definition.
In the displayed Port Definition dialog box, select a physical antenna in
the navigation tree and set the network layer that the antenna port
supports in the right pane.
In the displayed Port Definition dialog box, select a port of a physical
antenna in the navigation tree and set the antenna beamwidth pattern that
the port supports in the right pane.
 At least one antenna beamwidth pattern is required for a physical antenna port.
 The electrical downtilt of an antenna beamwidth pattern must be unique for one
physical antenna port.
Click OK.
Click Antenna Group.
In the displayed Antenna Group window, manage physical antenna
groups.
Click OK.
On the Power tab page in the Configuration area, set power parameters.
On the Antenna tab page in the Configuration area, set antenna
parameters.
In antenna combination, click Automatic Combination and set antenna
combination parameters. For details, see section 3.9.3 "Setting Antenna
Combination Parameters."
4. Click the Optimization Cost tab and set optimization cost parameters.
For detailed parameter description, see Optimization Cost Tab.
Step 5 Click OK.
The generated ACP group is displayed under the corresponding ACP node.
 If Calculate now is deselected during the ACP group creation, you can choose
ACP > ACP group in the navigation tree, right-click the ACP group, and choose
Properties from the shortcut menu to set planning parameters. After the planning
parameters are set, click Run to calculate the ACP group.
 During the planning, you can choose ACP > ACP group on the Operation tab
page in the browser window, right-click the ACP group, and choose Stop from the
shortcut menu to stop calculating site planning.
 The planning results are displayed in the lower part of the U-Net main window.
For detailed parameter description, see Parameter Description: Querying ACP
Results.
---End

3.9.3 Setting Antenna Combination Parameters

The U-Net allows you to set antenna combination parameters and create an
ACP group in antenna combination scenarios.
Prerequisites
 You have created computation ares. For basic knowledge about
computation areas and methods for creating computation areas, see
methods for creating vector objects.
 You have deployed multiple transceivers on a site.
Background Information
You need to set parameters for combining antennas in the following scenarios:
introducing new RATs to antenna creation, introducing new RATs to antenna
reconstruction, combining antennas, and combining antennas on multiple
networks.
Procedure
Step 3 Right-click ACP and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure
3-266.
Figure 3-266 New Automatic Cell Planning Group
Step 4 In the displayed Group X dialog box, set parameters. For detailed parameter
description, see Parameter Description: Creating an ACP Group.
Step 5 Click the Optimization Configuration tab.

Step 6 Click the Antenna tab in the Configuration area.
Step 7 Click Automatic Combination.
Step 8 In the displayed Automatic Combination dialog box, set antenna
combination parameters. For detailed parameter description, see Table 3-2.
Step 9 Perform the following operations as required.
If... Then...
you need to select In the navigation tree in the Combine Strategy area, select
Uncombined Layer in the Uncombined Layer.
Combine Strategy area
Right-click Uncombined Layer and choose New Group
from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-267.
In the navigation tree in the Combine Strategy area, select
a network layer.
Right-click the network layer and choose Move to >
Combined group from the shortcut menu, as shown in
Figure 3-268.
The network layer is moved to the combined group.
You can select Follow Base Layer, select a network layer
in the navigation tree in the Combine Strategy area,
right-click the network layer and choose Set As Base
Layer from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-269.
The network layer is set as the base network layer.
you need to select Site Level Click Browse to import an antenna combination strategy
Combine in the Combine file.
Strategy area

Figure 3-267 New Combined Group

Figure 3-268 Move to Combined Group

Figure 3-269 Set As Base Layer
Step 10 Click OK.

The U-Net performs antenna combination. Data generated after the antenna
combination is displayed on the Antenna tab page in the Configuration area.
Step 11 (Optional) Perform antenna combination manually.
On the Antenna tab page, select two or more rows displaying information
about the transceivers whose antennas are to be combined.
Click Combine.
In the displayed dialog box, set antenna combination parameters. For detailed
parameter description, see Error! Reference source not found..
Click OK.
Step 12 (Optional) Reset the transceivers whose antennas have been combined.
On the Antenna tab page, select one or more rows displaying information
about the transceivers whose antennas have been combined.
Click Reset Combination.
The selected transceivers whose antennas have been combined are restored to
the status before antenna combination.
Step 13 (Optional) Reset all the transceivers whose antennas have been combined.
Click Reset Combination.

All the transceivers whose antennas have been combined are restored to the
status before antenna combination.
---End
3.9.4 Querying ACP Results

After an ACP group is calculated, you can query ACP results.
Prerequisites
You have calculated an ACP group.
Operations for querying ACP results are the same for GSM, UMTS, and
LTE-FDD networks. This section uses querying ACP results for an LTE-FDD
network as an example.
Procedure
Step 3 Query the fitness curve.
Right-click ACP and choose Open Curve from the shortcut menu, as shown
in Figure 3-270.
Figure 3-270 Open Curve
In the displayed ACP Display Setting dialog box, select planning results to
be queried. For detailed parameter description, see Table 3-31.

Table 3-31 Parameters in the ACP Display Setting dialog box
ACP Group Name of an ACP group.
Base Iteration Base iteration.
Compared Iteration Compared iteration, which is compared with a base
iteration.
Display Display mode.
 Base Iteration: A base iteration is displayed.
 Compared Iteration: A compared iteration is
displayed.
 Difference: Differences between a base iteration and
a compared iteration are displayed.
In the displayed fitness trend chart, view the fitness and cost changes of each
iteration, as shown in Figure 3-271.
Figure 3-271 Curve
The left vertical coordinate indicates fitness, the right vertical coordinate
indicates cost, and the horizontal coordinate indicates the number of
iterations.
Step 4 Query the planning result table.
Right-click ACP and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu, as shown
in Figure 3-272.

Figure 3-272 Open Table
In the displayed ACP Display Setting dialog box, select planning results to
be queried. For detailed parameter description, see Table 3-31.
In the displayed window, check the planning results. For detailed parameter
description, see Parameter Description: Querying ACP Results.
Perform the following operations as required.
If... Then...
you need to query RF parameter Click RF Parameter Statistics.
adjustment statistics
In the displayed RF Parameter Statistics dialog box,
query RF parameter adjustment statistics between Base
Iteration and Compared Iteration. For detailed
parameter description, see Table 3-46.
In the Detail Statistics area, select RF parameters to be
queried.
In the Detail Statistics area, view RF parameter
adjustment statistics in the left pane and view the
statistics chart in the right pane.
you need to query objective Click Objectives Statistics.
implementation statistics
In the displayed Objectives Statistics dialog box, view
objective implementation statistics. For detailed
parameter description, see Table 3-47.
you need to submit ACP results Click Commit.
The ACP results in the table displayed in the window
are applied to NEs.
you need to roll back ACP Click Roll Back to Initial Value.
results
The ACP results that have been submitted to NEs are
If... Then...
rolled back to the status before the submission.
you need to export ACP results Click Export.
Set the file format and name, and specify the save path.
Then, click Save.
---End
3.9.5 Displaying ACP Results Geographically

After ACP is complete, you can view ACP results that are geographically
displayed.
Prerequisites
ACP is complete.
Operations for querying ACP results that are geographically displayed are the
same for GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD networks. This section uses querying
ACP results that are geographically displayed for an LTE-FDD network as an
example.
Procedure
 Setting parameters for geographic display
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose ACP > ACP group > Parent counter node >
Counter.
Step 3 Right-click the counter and choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu,

Figure 3-273 Display Setting
Step 4 In the displayed Display Setting dialog box, set display parameters.
Step 5 Click OK.
 Displaying ACP results geographically
Step 8 Right-click ACP and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.
Step 9 In the displayed ACP Display Setting dialog box, select planning results to
be queried and geographically displayed.
Step 10 Perform the following operations as required.
If... Then...
the planning results of the In the navigation tree, choose ACP > ACP group >
counters related to an Coverage > Counter > Optimization objective, as shown
optimization objective need to in Figure 3-274.
be geographically displayed The map window geographically displays the ACP results
of the counters related to the optimization objective.
the planning results of the In the navigation tree, choose ACP > ACP group >
counters related to an Coverage With Traffic > Counter > Optimization
optimization objective for objective, as shown in Figure 3-275.
If... Then...
which the traffic is considered Right-click the optimization objective and choose Traffic
need to be geographically Setting from the shortcut menu.
displayed In the displayed dialog box, set the volume of traffic to be
filtered out.
The map window displays the ACP results of the counters
whose traffic volumes are filtered out, which indicates
that only the planning results whose traffic volumes are
greater than or equal to the preset traffic volumes are
displayed.
RF parameter value In the navigation tree, choose ACP > ACP group >
differences between two Parameter > Parameter, as shown in Figure 3-276.
iterations need to be The map window geographically displays the RF
geographically displayed parameter value differences between two iterations.
Figure 3-274 Select Coverage Objective

Figure 3-275 Select Coverage With Traffic Objective
Figure 3-276 Select Parameter
 Querying a counter chart

Step 12 In the navigation tree, choose ACP > ACP group > Parent counter node >
Counter > Optimization objective.
Step 13 Right-click the ACP group and choose Statistics(PDF) or Statistics(CDF)
from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-277.

Figure 3-277 Statistics CDF
Step 14 In the displayed Statistics dialog box, view the PDF or CDF chart for the
optimization objective.
A PDF chart displays the percentage of the coverage grid area within each
segment to the total area.
A CDF chart displays the trend of coverage area increase as counter data
increases.
You can view the PDF or CDF chart only for an optimization objective that contains a
counter with a consistent value range.
---End
3.9.6 ACP GUI References

This section describes the GUIs and parameters for creating an ACP group
and querying ACP results.
Parameter Description: Creating an ACP Group

This section describes the parameters for creating an ACP group.
General Tab Page
Name Name of an ACP group, which uniquely identifies the
ACP group.
The U-Net enters a default name for each new ACP
group.
Resolution (m) Planning resolution.
Matrix Creation Type Link loss data source type.

 DT / MR: Link loss data is calculated based on DT or
MR data.
 Prediction: Link loss data is calculated based on
coverage prediction.
 DT / MR + Prediction: Link loss data is calculated
based on DT or MR data and coverage prediction.
With shadow Whether shadow fading is considered.
Cell edge coverage probability Probability of cell edge coverage, which is the probability
that the receive signal strength is stronger than the
specified threshold at the edge of a cell.
Indoor Coverage Whether penetration loss is considered.
Technology RAT.
Terminal Terminal type.
Service Service type.
DT / MR Options DT or MR data options.
This parameter is available when Matrix Creation Type
is set to DT / MR or DT / MR + Prediction.
Priority Whether to use DT data or MR data first.
 DT first: DT data is used first.
For details about how to import DT data, see the
description of importing DT data.
 MR first: MR data is used first.
For details about how to import MR data, see the
description of importing MR data.
Available DT or MR data is displayed in the lower part of the

Priority area.
Check all Whether to select all data.

Mode Planning mode.
 Fast: fast planning.
 Advanced: advanced planning.
There are five planning modes from Fast to Advanced,
the maximum number of iterations is 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, and
the fitness thresholds are 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, and
100%, respectively.
This parameter is available when Customized is
deselected.
Customized Whether to customize Max iteration count and Fitness
threshold.
Max iteration count Maximum number of iterations.
When the maximum number is reached, the planning
stops.
This parameter is available when Customized is selected.
Fitness threshold Fitness threshold.
When the fitness threshold is reached, the planning stops.
This parameter is available when Customized is selected.
Calculate now Whether to immediately calculate an ACP group.
Optimization Objectives Tab Page
Table 3-33 Area Setting parameters

Optimization Area Area to be optimized.
When you set multiple optimization areas, the
optimization areas cannot be overlapped.
If there is an optimization objective in an optimization
area, the area cannot be deleted.
Weight Weight of an optimization area.
The value is a positive integer.
A larger weight of an optimization area indicates a higher
optimization priority for the area.
Table 3-34 Objectives parameters
Name Name of an optimization objective, which uniquely
identifies the optimization objective.
The U-Net enters a default name for each new
Study Counter for an optimization objective.
Counters for optimization objectives vary according to
RATs. For details, see Table 3-35.
Weight Weight of an optimization objective.
The value is a positive integer.
A larger weight of an optimization objective indicates a
higher priority of the optimization objective.
Optimization Area Area to which an optimization objective belongs.

Traffic Map Traffic map and service type.
Only CS or PS services can be selected on a traffic map.
The precision of a traffic map must be the same as the
precision of a prediction group.
Layer Network layer for an optimization objective.
Network layers are related to RATs for counters.
A GSM network layer comprises of the GSM RAT and a
frequency band.
A UMTS network layer comprises of the UMTS RAT and
a frequency number.
An LTE-FDD network layer comprises of the LTE-FDD
RAT, a frequency band, and a frequency number.
Study Parameters Counter parameters of an optimization objective.
Counter parameters of optimization objectives vary
according to RATs. For details, see Table 3-36.
Table 3-35 Counter parameters for optimization objectives under different RATs
RAT Counter Description
GSM GSM BCCH Signal Level Downlink level.
GSM Overlapping Area Area with high overlapped
coverage.
UMTS UMTS RSCP Code power of a downlink pilot
signal.
UMTS Ec/Io Code signal-to-noise ratio of a
downlink pilot signal.
UMTS Overlapping Area Area with high overlapped
coverage.
LTE-FDD LTE RSRP Strength of a downlink reference
signal.
LTE RS SINR Signal to interference plus noise
ratio of a downlink reference
signal.
Table 3-36 Counter parameters of an optimization objective
Counter Parameter Description

GSM BCCH Signal Signal Level Downlink level threshold.

Counter Parameter Description

Level Threshold(dBm)
GSM Overlapping Area Overlapping Signal Level Level difference threshold of a
Threshold(dBm) cell with overlapped coverage.
Overlapping Cell Number Number of cells allowed for
overlapped coverage.
Minimum Signal Level Minimum level threshold of a cell
with overlapped coverage.
UMTS RSCP RSCP Threshold(dBm) Code power threshold of a
downlink pilot signal.
UMTS Ec/Io Ec/Io Threshold(dBm) Code signal-to-noise ratio
threshold of a downlink pilot
signal.
UMTS Overlapping Overlapping RSCP Level difference threshold of a
Area Threshold(dBm) cell with pilot pollution
adjustment.
Overlapping Cell Number Number of cells allowed for
overlapped coverage.
Minimum Signal Level Minimum level threshold of a cell
with overlapped coverage.
LTE RSRP RSRP Threshold(dBm) Strength threshold of a downlink
reference signal.
LTE RS SINR RS SINR Threshold(dBm) Signal to interference plus noise
ratio threshold of a downlink
reference signal.
Optimization Configuration Tab Page
Table 3-37 Parameters in the RF Parameter Settings area
Tuning cell area Adjustment area.
Use manual RF parameter Whether to use manually set RF parameters for
calculation.
Tune Setting of RF parameters to be adjusted.
 Power: whether to adjust power.
 Mechanical downtilt: whether to adjust a mechanical
downtilt.
 Electrical downtilt: whether to adjust an electrical
downtilt.

 Azimuth: whether to adjust an azimuth.
 Height: whether to adjust height.
 Antenna Type: whether to adjust an antenna type.
This parameter is unavailable when Use manual RF
parameter is selected.
Table 3-38 Parameters in the Port Definition dialog box
Port Port of a physical antenna.
Layer Range of network layers.
Available Patterns Range of antenna beamwidth patterns.
Selected Patterns Selected antenna beamwidth patterns.
Table 3-39 Parameters in the Antenna Type dialog box

Physical Antennas Range of physical antennas.
Antenna Groups Set physical antenna group.
Table 3-40 Parameters on the Power tab page in the Configuration area
Layer Network layer to which a cell belongs.
Tune Whether to adjust cell power.
If this parameter is selected, cell power can be adjusted.
If this parameter is deselected, cell power cannot be
adjusted.
Current Current cell power.

Range Type Power range type.
Absolute: absolute range.
Relative: relative range.
If Initial is set, the range is relative to Initial. If Initial is
not set, the range is relative to Current.
This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.
Max Maximum power.
Min Minimum power.
Manual Manually set power.
Step Power adjustment step.
This parameter is hidden by default.
Table 3-41 Parameters on the Antenna tab page in the Configuration area
Antenna Type Current Antenna beamwidth pattern currently used by a
transceiver.
Initial Physical antenna initially used by a transceiver.
This parameter applies to antenna combination scenarios.
Tune Whether to change an antenna type.
Antenna Candidate antenna group of which the type is to be
Type changed.
Electrical Tune Whether to adjust the electrical downtilt of a cell.
Downtilt If this parameter is selected, the electrical downtilt of a
cell can be adjusted.
If this parameter is deselected, the electrical downtilt of a
cell cannot be adjusted.
Port Port for a cell.
If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the ports for
cells are displayed based on the sequence of the cells.

Current Electrical downtilt currently used by a cell.
If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the
electrical downtilts for cells are displayed based on the
sequence of the cells.
Range Range type of an electrical downtilt.
Type Absolute: absolute range.
Max Maximum electrical downtilt.
If Range Type is set to Absolute, the value range is
[0,10].
maximum electrical downtilts for cells are set based on the
This parameter is unavailable when Locked is selected.
Min Minimum electrical downtilt.
[0,10].
minimum electrical downtilts for cells are set based on the
Step Step for adjusting an electrical downtilt.
If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the steps for
adjusting the electrical downtilts for cells are set based on
the sequence of the cells.
Initial Initial electrical downtilt.
Before setting this parameter, you must set Initial in
Antenna Type to set the physical antenna initially used
by the transceiver.
The specified electrical downtilt must be supported by the
current port.
If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the initial
electrical downtilts for cells are set based on the sequence
of cells.

Manual Manually entered electrical downtilt.
Before setting this parameter, you must set Initial in
Antenna Type to set the physical antenna initially used
by the transceiver.
The specified electrical downtilt must be supported by the
current port.
manually entered electrical downtilts for cells must be
based on the sequence of cells.
Mechanical Tune Whether to adjust the mechanical downtilt of a
Downtilt transceiver.
Current Mechanical downtilt currently used by a transceiver.
Range Range type for a mechanical downtilt.
Max Maximum mechanical downtilt.
[–90,90].
If Range Type is set to Relative, the value range is
[–10,10].
Min Minimum mechanical downtilt.
[–90,90].
[–10,10].
Step Step for adjusting a mechanical downtilt.
Initial Initial mechanical downtilt.
The value range is [–90,90].

Manual Manually entered mechanical downtilt.
The value range is [–90,90].
Azimuth Tune Whether to adjust the azimuth of a transceiver.
Current Current azimuth of a transceiver.
Range Range type of an azimuth.
Max Maximum azimuth.
[0,360).
[–180,180].
Min Minimum azimuth.
[0,360).
[–180,180].
Step Step for adjusting an azimuth.
Initial Initial azimuth.
The value range is [0,360).
Manual Manually entered azimuth.
The value range is [0,360).
Height Tune Whether to adjust the height of a transceiver.
Current Current height of a transceiver.

Range Range of heights.
Multiple values are separated by ";", for example,
10;20;30.
Initial Initial height.
Manual Manually entered height.
Co-Site Whether to keep the heights of transceivers on the same
Synchroniz site consistent.
ation If the selected transceivers are under the same base
station, the heights of these transceivers are adjusted
simultaneously.
Initial Site Equipment Initial site equipment.
If this parameter is set, Initial Miscellaneous Tx
Loss(DL) must be set.
Initial TMA Initial TMA.
If this parameter is set, Initial Site Equipment and Initial
Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL) must be set.
Initial Feeder Initial feeder.
If this parameter is set, Initial Feeder Length(DL),
Initial Site Equipment, and Initial Miscellaneous Tx
Initial Feeder Length(DL) Initial downlink feeder length.
Unit: m.
Initial Miscellaneous Tx Initial downlink miscellaneous loss.
Loss(DL) Unit: dB.
If this parameter is set, Initial Site Equipment must be
set.

Initial Jump Loss Initial downlink jumper loss from a TMA to an antenna
Ant-TMA(DL) port.
Unit: dB.
If Initial TMA is set, this parameter must be set.
Initial Jump Loss Initial jumper loss from a downlink TMA to a cabinet top.
TMA-BS(DL) Unit: dB.
Initial Jump Loss Ant-BS(DL) Initial jumper loss from a downlink antenna to a cabinet
top.
Unit: dB.
If Initial TMA is not set, this parameter must be set.
Initial Input Total Loss Method for calculating initial total loss.
If this parameter is selected, total loss is manually entered.
If this parameter is deselected, total loss is calculated by
programs.
If this parameter is selected, Initial Total Loss(DL) must
be set.
Initial Total Loss(DL) Initial downlink total loss, including TMA, feeder,
jumper, and miscellaneous loss.
Unit: dB.
Initial Number of Number of initial transmit antenna ports.
Transmission Antenna Ports If this parameter is set or not set, Initial Number of
Transmission Antennas must be set or not set
accordingly.
Initial Number of Number of initial transmit antennas.
Transmission Antennas If this parameter is set or not set, Initial Number of
Transmission Antenna Ports must be set or not set
accordingly.
Table 3-42 Parameters in the Automatic Combination dialog box
Combine same Whether to combine only transceivers with the same
Location/Height/Azimuth/Me locations, heights, azimuths, and mechanical downtilts.
ch Tilt. transceivers If this parameter is selected, parameters in the Combine
Strategy area cannot be set.
Universal Combine Whether to perform a common antenna combination.
This parameter applies to the scenario where all base
stations use the same rules to combine antennas.
Site Level Combine Whether to combine antennas at the base station level.
This parameter applies to the scenario where base stations
use different rules to combine antennas.
Follow Base Layer Whether to select a basic network layer.
After a base network layer is selected for combining
antennas, the azimuth, mechanical downtilt, and height are
set to the related values of the base network layer.
This parameter is available when Universal Combine is
selected.
Uncombined Layer Network layer where antennas are not combined.
selected.
Combined Group Combined group within which antennas at a network layer
are combined.
selected.
Path Save path of an imported file containing antenna
combination rules.
This parameter is available when Site Level Combine is
selected.
Minimum included angle Minimum included angle limit after antennas are
limit combined.
Initial Mechanical Downtilt Whether to use an initial mechanical downtilt.
If a base network layer is not set, the value of this
parameter is used as an initial mechanical downtilt after
antennas are combined.

Parameters on the Optimization Cost Tab Page
Table 3-43 Parameters on the Optimization Cost tab page

Max cost Whether to set the maximum cost.
When the maximum cost is reached, the planning stops.
Site Implementation Strategy Site implementation strategy.
Unsorted: Sites are not sorted.
Highest Gain: The highest gain is considered.
Highest Gain Per Cost: Both the gain and cost are
considered.
Table 3-44 Parameters in the Site Cost area
Site Name Name of a site within an adjustment area.
Azimuth Cost Cost for adjusting an azimuth.
Site Visit Whether to visit a site.
Power Cost Cost for adjusting power.
Electrical Cost Cost for adjusting an electrical downtilt.
Downtilt
Mechanical Cost Cost for adjusting a mechanical downtilt.
Downtilt
Height Cost Cost for adjusting antenna height.
Replacing Cost Cost for replacing an antenna.
Antenna
Site Visit Cost Cost for visiting a site.
Site Type Type of a site.
Parameter Description: Querying ACP Results

This section describes the parameters for querying ACP results.

Table 3-45 Parameters for querying ACP results
Original Azimuth Azimuth used in a base iteration.
Optimized Azimuth Azimuth used in a compared iteration.
Azimuth Difference Difference between the azimuths used in
two iterations.
Original Antenna Antenna used in a base iteration.
Optimized Antenna Antenna used in a compared iteration.
Original Mechanical Downtilt Mechanical downtilt used in a base
iteration.
Optimized Mechanical Downtilt Mechanical downtilt used in a compared
iteration.
Mechanical Downtilt Difference Difference between the mechanical
downtilts used in two iterations.
Original Electrical Downtilt Electrical downtilt used in a base iteration.
Optimized Electrical Downtilt Electrical downtilt used in a compared
iteration.
Electrical Downtilt Difference Difference between the electrical downtilts
used in two iterations.
Original Height Antenna height used in a base iteration.
Optimized Height Antenna height used in a compared
iteration.
Height Difference Difference between the antenna heights

used in two iterations.
Original Power Power used in a base iteration.
Optimized Power Power used in a compared iteration.
Power Difference Difference between the powers used in two
iterations.
Fitness(%) Overall fitness after parameters for a site to
which a cell belongs are modified.
Fitness Improvement(%) Improved fitness after parameters for a site
to which a cell belongs are modified.
Cost Total cost after parameters for a site to

Cost Improvement Improved cost after parameters for a site to
Fitness Improvement/ Cost Improvement Improved fitness per cost unit after
parameters for a site to which a cell belongs
are modified.
Table 3-46 Parameters in the RF Parameter Statistics dialog box
Azimuth Number of cells whose azimuths are
changed after ACP.
Mechanical Downtilt Number of cells whose mechanical
downtilts are changed after ACP.
Electrical Downtilt Number of cells whose electrical downtilts
are changed after ACP.
Effective Downtilt Number of cells whose mechanical or
electrical downtilts are changed after ACP.
Height Number of cells whose antenna heights are
changed after ACP.
Power Number of cells whose power is changed
after ACP.
RAT Network layer.
Base Average X Average X (azimuth, mechanical downtilt,
electrical downtilt, antenna height, or
power) in a base iteration.
Compared Average X Average X (azimuth, mechanical downtilt,
electrical downtilt, antenna height, or
power) in a compared iteration.
Changes of Average X Average difference between the Xs
(azimuths, mechanical downtilts, electrical
downtilts, antenna heights, or power) in two
iterations.
Table 3-47 Parameters in the Objectives Statistics dialog box
Optimization Objective Optimization objective.

Optimization Area Optimized area.
Base Coverage Area (km2) Size of the area achieving the optimization
objective in a base iteration.
% of Total Area Percentage of the area achieving the
optimization objective in a base iteration in
the entire area to be optimized.
Compared Coverage Area (km2) Size of the area achieving the optimization
objective in a compared iteration.
% of Total Area Percentage of the area achieving the
optimization objective in a compared
iteration in the entire area to be optimized.
Weight (Objective Weight * TRF) Weight of a counter.
Base (Weighted) (%) Percentage of the traffic volume for the area
achieving the optimization objective in a
base iteration in the total traffic volume.
Compared (Weighted) (%) Percentage of the traffic volume for the area
that meets the optimization objective in a
compared iteration in the total traffic
volume.
Difference (%) Difference between the values of Base
(With Traffic) (%) and Compared (With
Traffic) (%).
3.10 ACP-Automatic Cell Planning

The U-Net integrates ACP and ASP functions into an ACP-Automatic Cell
Planning function. The ACP-Automatic Cell Planning function applies to the
scenarios where both site planning and RF parameter planning are required.
This function can be used to plan the locations of sites to be activated and
created, and RF parameters including antenna and power parameters and
antenna heights. Currently, the ACP-Automatic Cell Planning function is only
a test function because it cannot replace the independent ACP or ASP function
due to the restrictions on the planning methodology, work efficiency, and
specifications.
3.10.1 Preparing Data for ACP-Automatic Cell Planning

Before performing ACP-Automatic Cell Planning, prepare the following data.
After the data is prepared, create a GSM planning project on the U-Net and
set the data in the related function modules based on the following sequence.

Electronic Map
An electronic map provides basic data for ACP-Automatic Cell Planning.
Based on the electronic map, the U-Net determines the received signal
strength and uses it to calculate the signal coverage range for each cell and
traffic that can be absorbed by the cell.
The U-Net supports electronic maps in Planet, *.TAB, and *.mif formats.
During ACP-Automatic Cell Planning, the imported electronic map should
contain the following layers: clutter (mandatory), altitude height (mandatory),
vector (optional), and building height (mandatory if the Vocanno propagation
model is used).
For details about how to import an electronic map into the U-Net, see section
Error! Reference source not found."Error! Reference source not found.."
Engineering Parameter Information

Engineering parameters include information such as the locations, types,
frequencies, frequency bands, and cell parameters of all existing and
candidate sites, and therefore are the basic data for ACP-Automatic Cell
Planning. Before GSM ACP-Automatic Cell Planning, prepare all engineering
parameters of candidate sites and import them into the U-Net.
The U-Net supports the import of engineering parameters in TXT, CSV, XLS,
and XLSX formats.
Engineering parameters contain the following information:
 Site information: site name and location (latitude and longitude)
 Antenna information: azimuth, downtilt angle, antenna type, and height
 Cell parameters: cell name, frequency band, number of TRXs, LAC, and
CI
 Engineering parameter template
For details about how to import engineering parameters, see section 2.4 xx
3.10.2 Creating an ACP-Automatic Cell Planning Group

The U-Net allows you to create an ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group. Then,
you can use the created group to perform ACP and ASP.
Prerequisites
 You have created a computation area.

Procedure
To create an ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group, perform the following
steps:
Step 1 Click in the Project Explorer window.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, right-click ACP-Automatic Cell Planning and choose
New from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-278.
Figure 3-278 New ACP-Automatic Cell Planning Group
Step 3 In the displayed Group x dialog box, set parameters.

1. Click the General tab, and set parameters on the General tab page, as

Figure 3-279 Setting parameters on the General tab page
Name Name of an ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group, which
uniquely identifies the ACP-Automatic Cell Planning
group.
ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group.
Resolution(m) Planning resolution.The default value is 50m.A smaller
value requires longer calculation time and memory and
disk space.
Matrix Creation Type Method of calculating link loss for a cell.
The U-Net provides three calculation methods: DT / MR,
Prediction, and DT / MR + Prediction.
Currently, the ACP and ASP use different methods to
calculate link loss when MR or DT data is available.
Therefore, DT / MR and DT / MR + Prediction are not
recommended.
The three methods of calculating link loss are described as
follows:
DT / MR: Link loss is calculated based on DT or MR
data. The U-Net calculates link loss only for the locations

where cell MR or DT data is available in cells. No link
pass data is available for locations where MR or DT data
is unavailable.
Prediction: Link loss is calculated based on prediction.
The U-Net calculates link loss based on the radio
propagation model, propagation calculation range, and
calculation resolution configured for a cell.
DT / MR + Prediction: Link loss is calculated by
combining the DT / MR and Prediction modes. If MR or
DT data is available in a cell, the U-Net calculates link
path for locations based on the DT / MR mode. If MR or
DT data is unavailable in a cell, the U-Net calculates link
loss based on the Prediction mode.
With shadow Whether shadow fading is considered when link loss is
calculated based on the radio propagation model when
Prediction is selected.If this option is selected, the U-Net
calculates the shadow fading margin based on Cell edge
coverage probability when calculating the coverage
based on the radio propagation model. The calculated
shadow fading margin will be used for calculating link
loss.
Cell edge coverage Probability of cell edge coverage, which is the probability
probability that the received signal strength is greater than the
specified threshold at the edge of a cell.This parameter
affects the calculated shadow fading margin.
Indoor Coverage Whether penetration loss is considered when link loss is
calculated based on the radio propagation model when
Prediction is selected.If this option is selected, the U-Net
considers the penetration loss of each clutter when
calculating the coverage signal level.
Technology Radio access technologies (RATs) available in the current
project. You need to set terminal and service information
for each RAT. The noise factor in the terminal
information and the body loss in the service information
affect the calculated coverage signal level.
Terminal Type of a terminal involved in coverage calculation when
Prediction is selected.
Service Type of a service involved in coverage calculation when
Prediction is selected.
DT / MR Options Settings of DT and MR data, which are used for selecting
DT or MR data sources and the DT or MR data priority
for calculation when Matrix Creation Type is set to DT /
MR or DT / MR + Prediction.Available DT or MR data
is displayed in the lower part of the Priority area. You
can select Check all to select all data.
This option is not recommended in the ACP-Automatic

Cell Planning function.
DT first When this option is selected, DT data is used
preferentially if both DT and MR data is available. For
details about how to import DT data, see "Importing DT
Data" in U-Net Online Help.
MR first When this option is selected, MR data is used
preferentially if both DT and MR data is available. For
details about how to import MR data, see "Importing MR
Data" in U-Net Online Help.
Conversion Setting Settings of link loss conversion. This function is available
when Matrix Creation Type is set to MR / DT or MR /
DT + Prediction. This function is not recommended in
the ACP-Automatic Cell Planning function.
Calculate now Whether to calculate the ACP-Automatic Cell Planning
group immediately.And you select this option and click
OK, the ACP-Automatic Cell Planning calculation starts
immediately.
2. Click the Objectives tab and set the computation area, coverage
objectives, and capacity objectives on the Objectives tab page.
1) Choose Area Setting from the navigation tree in the left pane, and
select a computation area in the right pane.
Figure 3-280 Parameters on the Objectives tab page – Area Settings

Computation area: area for calculation. After a computation area is

selected, you can set coverage and capacity objectives for it. The
U-Net selects sites and adjusts RF parameters to achieve the
objectives within the computation area.
2) Choose Coverage Objectives from the navigation tree in the left
pane, and check information about all coverage optimization
objectives in the right pane.
Figure 3-281 Parameters on the Objectives tab page – Coverage Objectives
3) Right-click Coverage Objectives and choose New from the shortcut

menu. In the displayed Group 1 dialog box, create a coverage
objective and set related parameters in the right pane. You can
create multiple optimization objectives to facilitate planning.
When planning both sites and RF parameters, the U-Net uses only the preset RSRP
study for site planning. Other studies only affect RF parameter planning.
Figure 3-282 New Coverage Objectives

Figure 3-283 Creating an optimization objective
Table 3-49 Parameters of an optimization objective

Name Name of an optimization objective, which uniquely
identifies the optimization objective.
Study Study for an optimization objective.
Studies for optimization objectives vary according to
RATs. An LTE network supports RSRP and RS SINR
studies.
Weight Weight of an optimization objective.The value is a
positive integer.
A larger weight indicates a higher priority of the
Optimization Area Area for an optimization objective, which must be the
same as the computation area.
Traffic Map If CS and PS traffic volumes at each location are used as
weights of problems during RF parameter optimization,
you can select a related CS or traffic map.
The resolution of the traffic map must be the same as that
of the coverage prediction group.
Network layers are related to the RATs for studies:
The GSM network layer information comprises of GSM
and a frequency band.
The UMTS network layer information comprises of
UMTS and an ARFCN.
The LTE FDD/TDD network layer information comprises
of LTE FDD/TDD, a frequency band, and an ARFCN.
Study Parameters Study parameters for an optimization objective.
Study parameters for optimization objectives vary
according to RATs. For the RSRP study, you need to set
RSRP Threshold and Target Coverage Ratio. For the
RS SINR study, you need to set RS SINR Threshold and
Target Coverage Ratio.
Target Coverage Ratio is the percentage of areas that
meets the predefined threshold within a computation area
to the total computation area.
4) Choose Capacity Objectives from the navigation tree in the left

pane, and check information about all capacity optimization
objectives in the right pane.
Figure 3-284 Setting parameters of a capacity objective

Table 3-50 Parameters in the Capacity Objectives area
Technology Radio access technologies (RATs) available in the current

project.You can set different capacity planning objectives
for different RATs.
Used Whether to use the traffic statistics of a RAT. If this
option is selected, the U-Net uses the traffic map of the
related RAT to help determine site locations during site
planning for coverage problems.
If this option is selected, all frequency bands of the related
RAT are displayed in the Layer setting table in the lower
part. You can set capacity planning parameters for each
frequency band.
Resolve Capacity overload Whether to resolve capacity overload for a cell of a
RAT.If this option is selected, the U-net resolve cell
capacity overload during site planning by expanding the
capacity of existing sites, selecting sites, and adding
macro or micro sites.
The LTE network does not support this parameter.
Therefore, even this parameter is set for the LTE network,
the calculation results are not affected.
Traffic Map Traffic map to be used for site planning. The traffic data
in the traffic map can be used as weights of grids to help
determine site locations for solving weak-coverage
problems. The traffic data can also be used to calculate the
load of a cell and then determine whether the cell is
overloaded.
Prefer FreqBand Preferred frequency band. This parameter specified a
frequency band for preferentially absorbing traffic under a
RAT. When a location is covered by several cells of the
same RAT but on different frequency bands, the traffic at
this location can be absorbed by the cell on the preferred
frequency band under certain conditions.
Minimum Signal Level (dBm) Minimum signal level of a cell on the preferred frequency
band.When the cell coverage signal level on the preferred
frequency band is greater than the threshold at a location,
the traffic will be absorbed by the cell on the preferred
frequency band.
Layer Network layer under a RAT.

This option is used to set capacity planning parameters at
different layers for GSM, UMTS or LTE and the settings
apply to site planning.
Allow Expansion Whether capacity expansion is allowed.If this option is
selected, when a sector is overloaded, it's capacity can be
expanded by adding TRXs under GSM or carriers under
UMTS.
Add New Sector Whether to add an inter-frequency sector. If this option is
selected, when a cell on a frequency band is overloaded
and the problem cannot be resolved by expanding the cell
capacity, you can create an inter-frequency sector that has
the same azimuth as the overloaded cell to share traffic.
New Sector Antenna Antenna for an inter-frequency sector. If Add New Sector
is selected, you can set an antenna type for a new sector.
New Cell Propagation Model Radio propagation model for an inter-frequency sector.If
this option is selected, you can set a radio propagation
model for a new sector.
Max TRX/Carrier Per Sector Maximum number of TRXs or carriers allowed by each
sector. If Allow Expansion is selected, the number of new
carriers for UMTS or TRXs for GSM cannot exceed the
threshold.
3. Click the Configuration tab, and set optimization parameters on the

Configuration tab page.

Figure 3-285 Setting parameters on the Configuration tab page
1) In the Optimization Options area, set policies for reconfiguring

parameters.
Table 3-51 Parameters in the Optimization Options area

Tuning cell area Adjustment area.It is recommended that the adjustment
area be consistent with the computation area.
Optimization Options Settings of RF parameters to be adjusted:
 Power: whether to adjust the power.
 Mechanical downtilt: whether to adjust the mechanical
downtilt angle.
 Electrical downtilt: whether to adjust the electrical
downtilt angle.
 Azimuth: whether to adjust the azimuth.
 Height: whether to adjust the height.
 Antenna Type: whether to adjust the antenna type.
2) Click Port Definition. In the displayed Port Definition dialog box,

choose a physical antenna from the navigation tree in the left pane,
and set the network layers supported by the ports of the physical
antenna in the right pane. The settings ensure that an antenna with
multiple ports can be used under different RATs.
Choose a port of a physical antenna from the navigation tree in the

left pane, and set the antenna sidelobe pattern supported by the port
in the right pane. The settings are used to optimize the electrical
downtilt angle.
3) Right-click a physical antenna and choose Add Port from the
shortcut menu to add a port for the antenna. Then, you can set RATs
network layers, antenna sidelobe patterns supported by the port.
Figure 3-286 Defining antenna ports
Table 3-52 Parameters in the Port Definition dialog box

Port Port of a physical antenna.
Layer Available network layers.
Available Patterns Available antenna sidelobe patterns.
Selected Patterns Selected antenna sidelobe patterns.
4) Click Antenna Group. In the displayed Antenna Group dialog

box, set an antenna group.
You can define multiple physical antennas in the antenna group.
When adjusting the antenna type, the U-Net selects a proper antenna
from the antenna group to replace the existing antenna.
Figure 3-287 Defining an antenna group
Table 3-53 Parameters in the Antenna Group dialog box
Physical Antennas Available physical antennas.
Antenna Groups Physical antenna groups that have been set.
New Group Used to add an antenna group in the Antenna Groups
area.
Delete Used to delete selected antenna groups in the Antenna
Groups area.
> Used to move selected physical antennas from the
Physical Antennas area in the left pane to the selected
antenna groups in the Antenna Groups area in the right
pane.
< Used to move selected physical antennas from the
Antenna Groups area in the right pane to the Antenna
Groups area in the left pane.
5) In the Site Selection Options area, set site planning policies.

Table 3-54 Parameters in the Site Selection Options area
Site Selection Whether to select candidate sites. When this option is
selected, you can set candidate sites on the Sites tab page
in the Configuration area.
Macro site addition Whether to add macro sites. When this option is selected,
you can solve coverage and capacity problems within a
computation area by adding macro sites.
Micro site addition Whether to add micro sites. When this option is selected,
you can solve coverage and capacity problems within a
computation area by adding micro sites.
Define site template Used to define templates for adding macro and micro sites
in the displayed dialog box. The U-Net uses defined
macro and micro site templates to deploy related sites at
planned locations and predict the coverage signal level.
Based on the prediction results, the U-Net can analyze
whether weak-coverage and cell overload problems are
solved after sites are added.
You can modify parameters in site templates using the
function of defining site templates on the U-Net.
Set Clutter Constraint Used to set cutter to which sites can be added in the
displayed dialog box.
6) Click the Power tab and set power optimization parameters on the
Power tab page.
Figure 3-288 Setting parameters on the Power tab page

Table 3-55 Parameters on the Power tab page in the Configuration area
Layer Network layer of a cell.
Tune Whether to adjust the cell power.
If this parameter is selected, the cell power can be
adjusted.
If this parameter is not selected, the cell power cannot be
adjusted.
Current Current cell power.
Range Type Power range type.
Absolute: absolute power range.
Relative: power range related to the value in Current.
This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.
Max Maximum power.
Min Minimum power.
Step Power adjustment step.
This parameter is not displayed by default.You can
right-click the table on the Power tab page and choose
Display Columns from the shortcut menu to show this
parameter.
7) Click the Antenna tab and set antenna optimization parameters on

the Antenna tab page.
Automatic Combination, Combine, Reset Combination, and
Reset All in the bottom of the Antenna tab page are used in
co-antenna scenarios and are not recommended for the
ACP-Automatic Cell planning function. For details about these
functions, see "Setting Antenna Combination Parameters" in U-Net
Online Help.

Figure 3-289 Setting parameters on the Antenna tab page
Table 3-56 Parameters on the Antenna tab page in the Configuration area

Antenna Type Current Antenna sidelobe pattern currently used by a transceiver.
Initial Initial physical antenna used by a transceiver.
This parameter applies to antenna combination scenarios.
Tune Whether to adjust the antenna type.
Antenna Candidate antenna group for antenna type adjustment.
Group When the antenna type can be adjusted, the U-Net selects
a proper physical antenna from the candidate antenna
group to replace the current physical antenna.
Electrical Downtilt Tune Whether to adjust the electrical downtilt angle of a cell.
If this parameter is selected, the electrical downtilt angle
of a cell can be adjusted.
If this parameter is not selected, the electrical downtilt
angle of a cell cannot be adjusted.
Port Port of a cell.
If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the ports of
cells are displayed based on the cell sequence.
Different ports define degrees of all available electrical
downtilt angles of a cell. The U-Net selects a proper
Pattern file only from the antenna pattern files defined for
the port.

Current Current electrical downtilt angle of a cell.
electrical downtilt angles of cells are displayed based on
the cell sequence.
Range Range type of the electrical downtilt angle.
Type Absolute: absolute range of the electrical downtilt angle.
Relative: relative range of the electrical downtilt angle.
If Initial is set, the power range is relative to Initial. If
Initial is not set, the power range is relative to Current.
Max Maximum electrical downtilt angle.
When Range Type is set to Absolute, the value range is
from 0 to 10.
maximum electrical downtilt angles of cells must be set
based on the cell sequence.
This parameter is unavailable when Locked is selected.
Min Minimum electrical downtilt angle.
from 0 to 10.
minimum electrical downtilt angle must be set for each
cell.
Step Step for adjusting an electrical downtilt angle.
If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the step for
adjusting the electrical downtilt angle of each cell must be
set.
This parameter is not displayed by default.
Initial Initial electrical downtilt angle.
The value range is from 0 to 90.
Before setting this parameter, You must set Initial under
Antenna Type, which means that you must set the initial
physical antenna used by the transceiver.
The entered electrical downtilt angle must be supported by
the current port.
If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the initial
electrical downtilt angle must be set for each cell.

Mechanical Tune Whether to adjust the mechanical downtilt angle of a
Downtilt transceiver.
Current Mechanical downtilt angle that is currently used by a
transceiver.
Range Range type for a mechanical downtilt angle.
Type Absolute: absolute range of the mechanical downtilt
angle.
Relative: relative range of the mechanical downtilt angle.
Max Maximum mechanical downtilt angle.
from –90 to 90.
When Range Type is set to Relative, the value range is
from –10 to 10.
Min Minimum mechanical downtilt angle.
from –90 to 90.
from –10 to 10.
Step Step for adjusting a mechanical downtilt angle.
Initial Initial mechanical downtilt angle.
The value range is from –90 to 90.
Azimuth Tune Whether to adjust the azimuth of a transceiver.
Current Current azimuth of a transceiver.
Range Azimuth range type.
Type Absolute: absolute range of the azimuth.
Relative: relative range of the azimuth.

Max Maximum azimuth.
from 0 to 360, excluding 360.
from –180 to 180.
Min Minimum azimuth.
from 0 to 360, excluding 360.
from –180 to 180.
Step Step for adjusting an azimuth.
Initial Initial azimuth.
The value range is from 0 to 360, excluding 360.
Height Tune Whether to adjust the height of a transceiver.
Current Current height of a transceiver.
Range Available heights.Multiple heights are separated by a
semicolon (;), for example, 10;20;30.
Initial Initial height.
Manual Manually entered height.
Co-Site Whether to keep the heights of co-site transceivers
Synchro consistent.
nization If the selected transceivers are at the same site, the heights
of these transceivers are adjusted simultaneously.
Initial Site Equipment Initial site equipment.
If this parameter is set, Initial Miscellaneous Tx

Initial TMA Initial TMA.
Initial Feeder Initial feeder.
If this parameter is set, Initial Feeder Length(DL),
Initial Site Equipment, and Initial Miscellaneous Tx
Initial Feeder Length(DL) Initial downlink feeder length.
Unit: m.
Initial Miscellaneous Tx Initial downlink miscellaneous loss.
Loss(DL) Unit: dB.
If this parameter is set, Initial Site Equipment must be
set.
Initial Jump Loss Initial downlink jumper loss from the TMA to the antenna
Ant-TMA(DL) port.
Unit: dB.
Initial Jump Loss Initial jumper loss from the downlink TMA to the cabinet
TMA-BS(DL) top.
Unit: dB.
Initial Jump Loss Initial jumper loss from the downlink antenna to the
Ant-BS(DL) cabinet top.
Unit: dB.
If Initial TMA is not set, this parameter must be set.
Initial Input Total Loss Method of calculating the initial total loss.
If this parameter is selected, you need to enter the total
loss.
If this parameter is not selected, the U-Net calculates the
total loss.
If this parameter is selected, Initial Total Loss (DL) must
be set.

Initial Total Loss(DL) Initial downlink total loss, including the TMA, feeder,
jumper, and miscellaneous loss.
Unit: dB.
Initial Number of Number of initial TX antenna ports.
Transmission Antenna Ports This parameter must be set or not be set together with
Initial Number of Transmission Antennas.
Initial Number of Number of initial TX antennas.
Transmission Antennas This parameter must be set or not be set together with
Initial Number of Transmission Antenna Ports.
8) Click the Sites tab and set antenna optimization parameters on the
Sites tab page.
Figure 3-290 Setting parameters on the Sites tab page
Table 3-57 Parameters on the Sites tab page in the Configuration area
Site Name Name of an existing or candidate site on the live network.

Layer Network layer at a site.
Original Status Initial site status.
The value can be Existed or Candidate. Existed: A site is
available and deployed on the live network. The site is
used for initial network capacity and coverage calculation,
and it is not used for site selection.
Candidate: A site is a candidate site. The site is not used
for calculating initial network coverage and capacity
calculation.

Locked Whether a candidate site is locked. If a candidate site is

locked, the U-Net selects it directly and then selects other
candidate sites during site planning.
Excluded Whether a site is excluded. If a site is excluded, it will not
be used for site planning.
Site Type Type of a site: macro or micro site.
Site Cost Score of the site cost. A higher site cost score indicates a
lower power probability a candidate site will be selected.
Site Priority Priority of a site. The value 0 indicates the lowest priority.
A higher priority indicates a higher power probability a
candidate site will be selected.
The final score of Site Priority and Site Cost determines
the final site selection priority.
User Define 1 Score of user-defined dimension 1.
Comments Comments on sites.
4. Click the Costs tab, and set optimization cost parameters on the Costs
tab page.
Cost parameters are not proper and therefore are not recommended in the
ACP-Automatic Cell planning function.
Step 4 Click OK.
The created ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group is displayed under the
ACP-Automatic Cell Planning node.
----End
3.10.3 Checking ACP-Automatic Cell Planning Results

After an ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group is calculated, you can check the
planning results.
Prerequisites
You have calculated an ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group.
Context
Operations of checking ACP-Automatic Cell Planning results are the same for
GSM, UMTS, and LTE FDD. This section uses the operations of checking
ACP-Automatic Cell Planning results for LTE FDD as an example.

Procedure

Step 2 In the navigation tree, right-click a planning group under the ACP-Automatic
Cell Planning node and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.
Figure 3-291 Open Table
Step 3 In the displayed table window, check the planning results.
Figure 3-292 Planning result table

Table 3-58 Parameters for checking ACP-Automatic Cell Planning results
Layer Network layer of a cell.
Longitude Longitude of a cell.
Latitude Latitude of a cell.
Tuned Whether RF parameters such as Antenna Type,
Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Electrical Downtilt,
Height, and Power have been adjusted.
States Initial: initial cell status.
Final: final cell status.
Antenna Type Initial: initial physical antenna of a cell.
Final: final physical antenna of a cell.
Azimuth Initial: initial azimuth of a cell.
Final: final azimuth of a cell.
Difference: difference of the azimuths of a cell before
and after the adjustment.
Mechanical Downtilt Initial: initial mechanical downtilt angle of a cell.
Final: final mechanical downtilt angle of a cell.
Difference: difference of the mechanical downtilt
angles of a cell before and after the adjustment.
Electrical Downtilt Initial: initial electrical downtilt angle of a cell.
Final: final electrical downtilt angle of a cell.
Difference: difference of the electrical downtilt angles
of a cell before and after the adjustment.
Height Initial: initial antenna height for a cell.
Final: final antenna height for a cell.
Difference: difference of the antenna heights for a cell
before and after the adjustment.
Power Initial: initial TX power of a cell.
Final: final TX power of a cell.
Difference: difference of the TX power of a cell
before and after the adjustment.
Coverage Area(km2) Initial: initial coverage area for a best serving cell.
Final: final coverage area for a best serving cell.
Poor Coverage Ratio: percentage of the poor coverage
area.
CS Traffic(Erlang) Initial: initial CS traffic absorbed by a cell.
Final: final CS traffic absorbed by a cell.
PS Traffic(KByte) Initial: initial PS traffic absorbed by a cell.
Final: final PS traffic absorbed by a cell.
HSDPA Traffic Volume(KBytes) Initial: initial HSDPA traffic absorbed by a cell.
Final: final HSDPA traffic absorbed by a cell.
This parameter value is available only to UMTS cells.
Traffic Overflow Initial: initial cell traffic overload percentage.
Final: final cell traffic overload percentage.
This parameter value is empty for the LTE network
because the LTE network does not support capacity
evaluation.
TRXs/Carriers Initial: initial number of TRXs or carriers under a
sector.
Required: number of TRXs or carriers required for the
planning.
Max: maximum number of TRXs or carriers allowed
under a sector.
Final: final number of TRXs or carriers under a sector.
The larger numbers in the initial and planned values
are used.
Required to Add: number of TRXs or carriers to be
added.
This parameter value is empty for the LTE network
because the LTE network does not support capacity
evaluation.
1. Perform the following operations as required.
If you need to... Then…

Check the overview of RF 1. Click Changes Summary.
parameter adjustment and site
planning results 2. In the displayed Changes Summary dialog box,
check the number of selected sites, number of new
macro sites, number of micro sites, number of sites
whose capacity is expanded at each network layer,
and number of cells for which the following
parameters are adjusted on the live network:
azimuth, mechanical and electrical downtilt angles,
height, power, and antenna.
If you need to... Then…

3. You can check the numbers of adjusted sites and
cells in the bar charts in the lower part of the dialog
box.
Check objective achievement 1. Click Objectives Statistics.

statistics
2. In the displayed Objectives Statistics dialog box,
check the objective achievement statistics.
Check the sort results of 1. Click Changes Order.

selected and new sites or RF
parameter optimization 2. In the displayed Changes Order dialog box, check
the sort results of site planning results and RF parameter
optimization for each RAT.
Commit ACP-Automatic Cell Click Commit.

Planning results The ACP-Automatic Cell Planning results including the
RF parameters adjustment results for new cells and
existing cells on the live network in the window will be
applied to NEs.
Export ACP-Automatic Cell 1. Click Export.
Planning results
2. Set the file format and name, and specify a save path
for the file. Then, click Save.

Figure 3-293 Checking RF parameter adjustment and site planning results
Table 3-59 Parameters in the Change Summary dialog box
Layer Network layer.
Display Whether to display the current network
layer.
Selected Site Number of selected sites for site planning.
New Macro Site Number of new macro sites for site
planning.
New Micro Site Number of new micro sites for site
planning.
Expansion Number of cells whose power is changed
after the planning.
Azimuth Number of cells whose azimuths are
changed after the planning.
Mechanical Number of cells whose mechanical
downtilts are changed after the planning.
Electrical Number of cells whose electrical downtilts
are changed after the planning.

Height Number of cells whose antenna heights are
changed after the planning.
Power Number of cells whose power is changed
after the planning.
Antenna Type Number of cells whose physical antenna
types are changed after the planning.
Figure 3-294 Checking objective achievement statistics
Table 3-60 Parameters in the Objectives Statistics dialog box
Area Area for an optimization objective.
Study Study for an optimization objective.
Target Coverage Ratio(%) Target coverage percentage of the objective.
Initial(%) Initial coverage percentage.
Initial Area(km2) Initial coverage area.
Final(%) Final coverage percentage.
Final Area(km2) Final coverage area.

Improvement(%) Improvement percentage. Improvement
percentage = Initial coverage achievement
percentage – Final coverage achievement
percentage
Improvement Area(km2) Improvement area. Improvement area =
Initial coverage achievement area – Final
coverage achievement area
----End
3.10.4 Displaying ACP-Automatic Cell Planning Results

on a Map
After ACP-Automatic Cell Planning is complete, you can check the planning
results displayed on a map.
Prerequisites
The ACP-Automatic Cell Planning is complete.
Context
Operations of displaying ACP-Automatic Cell Planning results on a map are
the same for GSM, UMTS, and LTE FDD. This section uses the operations of
displaying ACP-Automatic Cell Planning results on a map for LTE FDD as an
example.
Procedure
To set parameters for geographical display, perform the following steps:

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose ACP-Automatic Cell Planning > a planning
group > a network layer > an optimization objective > Final/Initial/Difference.
Right-click Final/Initial/Difference and choose Display Setting from the
shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-295.

Figure 3-295 Display Setting
Step 3 In the displayed Display Setting dialog box, set display parameters.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 You can select or clear a node ion the navigation tree to show or hide the
initial and final results of the related study.
----End
To check study statistics in charts, perform the following steps:

Step 7 In the navigation tree, choose ACP-Automatic Cell Planning > a planning
group > a network layer > a study > an optimization objective. Right-click the
optimization objective and choose Statistics(PDF) or Statistics(CDF) from
the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-296.

Figure 3-296 Statistics CDF
Step 8 In the displayed Statistics dialog box, check the PDF or CDF statistics chart
for the current objective.
The PDF statistics chart displays the percentage of the area for the
coverage grids within each range to the total area.
The CDF statistics chart displays the increase trend of the coverage area
with the increase of study values.
You can view the PDF or CDF chart only for an optimization objective that contains a
counter with continuous values.
----End

Error! Unknown document property name. 4 Appendix
4 Appendix
4.1 Obtaining Engineering Parameter Templates

of the U-Net Quickly
The U-Net provides the function of automatically exporting the engineering
parameter template so that network planning engineers can quickly prepare
engineering parameters required by the U-Net. After configuring related
information based on the engineering parameter template, you can directly
import the configured information to the U-Net more convenient and much
quicker. In addition, the function provides best reference for users who use the
U-Net for the first time. They can quickly know the parameters required by
the planning.
The procedure for obtaining the engineering parameter templates is as
follows:
Step 1 Choose File > Generate Engineering Parameter Template, as shown in
Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 Exporting the engineering parameter template
Step 2 You must prepare the default parameters. Also, you can set optional
engineering parameters based on the network system information and
scenarios (export engineering parameters based on the coverage prediction or
neighboring cell planning). The following is an example of setting parameters
in the LTE-FDD network.
Common counters are selected by default to facilitate your selection. You can deselect
default counters as required. The Site Name study must be selected for a site. The Site
Name and Transceiver Name counters must be selected for a transceiver. The
Transceiver Name and Cell Name counters must be selected for a cell. You can
select other counters as required. To successfully import data, the mapping among
Site Name, Transceiver Name, and Cell Name must be correct, as shown in Figure
4-2.

Figure 4-2 Exporting the engineering parameter template of a site
Figure 4-3 Exporting the engineering parameter template of a transceiver

Figure 4-4 Exporting the engineering parameter template of a cell
----End
4.2 Polygon
The ATOLL provides multiple zones. Compared with the ATOLL, the U-Net
provides polygons that can be configured more flexible and convenient. The
U-Net provides polygons of only one type and does not distinguish polygons
by functions. You can select polygons based on concrete services. For
example, you can select a prediction area in the prediction group window
when the prediction is performed and select a planning area in the neighboring
cell planning window when the neighboring cell planning is performed.
4.2.1 Creating a Polygon

You can right-click Polygon and choose New, as shown in Figure 4-5. Also,
you can click the Add Polygon button on the tool bar, as shown in Figure 4-6.
Then, you can draw a polygon on the GIS map. After drawing a polygon,
double-click the polygon to generate the required polygon. After a polygon is
generated, a corresponding node is generated under Polygons on the GEO tab
page, as shown in Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-5 Creating a polygon (1)
4.2.2 Polygon Operations

On the node of the navigation tree, you can perform operations on a polygon,
such as Properties, Statistic, Rename, Export, Center in The Map, and
Delete.

Figure 4-8 Polygon operations
On the GIS map, right-click the line or point of a polygon and choose
operations such as Properties, Show Polygon Name, Add Point, Edit Point,
Delete Point, and Delete Polygon.
Figure 4-9 Polygon operations
Move the cursor to the frame of the polygon. You can view simple properties
of the polygon, such as name, area, top boundary, bottom boundary, left
boundary, and right boundary.

Figure 4-10 Viewing properties of a polygon
4.2.3 Setting the Properties of a Polygon

You can set the properties of a polygon such as the location, color, and display
mode. The operation procedure is as follows:
Right-click a polygon on the node of the navigation tree or on the GIS map
and choose Properties to display the Polygon Properties window.
Figure 4-11 Displaying the properties of a polygon

Figure 4-12 Polygon properties (1)
(Region Properties: On the Region Properties tab page, you can set the name
of the polygon, and set whether the polygon name and comments are
displayed on the GIS map.)

(Points List: On the Points List tab page, you can add, delete, or edit the point
comprising the polygon in X/Y or Longitude/Latitude mode.)
(Font: On the Font tab page, you can modify the display font of the polygon
name.)

(Color & Line: On the Color & Line tab page, you can modify the frame
color of the polygon, filling color of the polygon, and line width.)
4.2.4 Combing Polygons

You can combine polygons as required. The operation procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Right-click Polygons and choose Polygon Operator to display the Polygon
Operator window.
Figure 4-16 Polygon operations (1)

Step 2 Choose a combination mode (Intersect, Union, or Exclude) and select the
polygons to be combined in the Current Polygons area. Then, click Run to
generate a new polygon in the Output area. You can rename or delete the
generated polygon, as show in Figure 4-18.

----End
4.2.5 Polygon Usage

After a polygon is created, the polygon can be used in multiple services and
has different meanings. The following is an example of a polygon in the
prediction scenario. Polygon used in the prediction scenario: You can select a
polygon in a prediction group. The polygon represents that the prediction is
performed only in the polygon, as shown in Figure 4-19.

Figure 4-19 Polygon usage
4.3 Point Analysis

The U-Net provides the point analysis function to analyze the signal status at
a point. For example, signals of some regions are abnormal during the
prediction or two cells that may be neighboring cells according to their
geographical locations are actually not neighboring cells during the
neighboring cell planning based on coverage. In the preceding scenarios, you
can use the point analysis function to analysis the signal status in details.
Click on the tool bar to display the point analysis window. The mouse
pointer changes to , indicating the location of the receiver. Right-click

the circle and choose Coordinate to set the coordinate of the point.

Figure 4-20 Point analysis (1)
4.3.1 Viewing Signal Statuses from Each Cell to the

Point Respectively
In the point analysis window shown in Figure 4-22, click Profile. You can
view the signal receiving status of the receiver by choosing different cells in
the point analysis window. If you want to compare the current result with the
prediction result, you can set the point analysis parameters based on
parameters of the prediction group. The parameter description is as follows:

Parameters on the upper part of the window are as follows:
 Transceiver: indicates the selected transceiver.

 Cell Edge Coverage Probability: indicates the cell edge coverage
probability. This parameter is used to calculate the shadow fading margin.
This parameter is the same as that in the prediction group.
 Indoor Coverage: indicates whether the penetration loss is taken into
consideration. If this parameter is selected, the penetration loss is taken
into consideration. If this parameter is not selected, the penetration loss is
not taken into consideration. This parameter is the same as that in the
prediction group.
 Cell: indicates the selected cell. The terrain profile between the selected
cell and the terminal is analyzed.
 DL RSRP: indicates the downlink RSRP strength from the selected cell
to the receiver.
If you want to view the downlink path loss from the selected cell to the
receiver, choose Path Loss.

You can view the terrain profile between the transceiver and the receiver on
the lower part of the point analysis window.
The blue ellipsoid is the Fresnel region for calculating the diffraction. The
green line indicates the horizon propagation distance. Right-click the terrain
profile and choose Link Budget to check the conditions related to the link
budget. When the cell propagation model is SPM, you can choose Model
Details to view the detailed information about the propagation model.
Right-click the terrain profile and choose Copy to copy the current terrain
profile to the shear plate of the operating system.
4.3.2 Viewing Signal Status from Each Cell to the Point

Simultaneously
In the point analysis window, choose Reception.

You can view all cells and signal strengths when the dynamic scope of the
signal strength received by the receiver in the location is about 30 dB. The
function is similar to that of the Overlapping Zones study. If the number of
cells whose signals can cover the point is larger, the number of the cells
interfering the main service cell is larger.
You can also click Results to display the Results window, as shown in Figure
4-27.
You can view not only the received signal strength of all transceiver but also
the latitude/longitude, altitude height, and terrain type of the receiver in the
specified location.
4.3.3 Viewing Signal Statuses of Pilots and Services of

the Best Server Cell
You can choose Signal Analysis in the point analysis window. After setting
parameters such as Terminal, Service, and Mobility, you can double click
Downlink or Uplink to view signal statuses of pilots and services of the best
server cell. If you want to compare counters in the current window with
studies in the predication group, you need to ensure that parameter settings in
the prediction group are the same as those for the point analysis.

 Terminal: indicates a terminal type of the receiver.

 Mobility: indicates the mobility type of the receiver.
 Service: indicates the service type of the receiver.
 Neighbour PDSCH Load(%): indicates the interference on the neighbor
PDSCH.
 Neighbour PDSCH Load(%): indicates the interference on the neighbor
PDCCH.
Prediction results of receiving signal strength of different cells are displayed
in the Reference Signal Reception area in the histogram in a descending
order. The cell with the strongest receiving strength is the best server cell at
the specified location.
You can view the pilot signals, service signals, and whether the uplink and the
downlink are abnormal on the right part of the point analysis window. You can
click Downlink to display the related downlink signal status and click Uplink
to display the related uplink signal status.
The downlink result is displayed as follows:

 Received Reference Signal Level: indicates the strength of the pilot

signal received by the terminal.
 PDSCH Total Noise(I+N): indicates the sum of the interference power
received by the terminal and the noise power of the terminal.
 Reference Signal C/(I+N): indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the
reference signal.
 PDSCH C/(I+N): indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the downlink
traffic channel.
 Bearer: indicates the modulation and demodulation mode used by the
terminal.
 PDSCH Peak Throughput: indicates the peak throughput of the
downlink traffic channel.
The uplink result is displayed as follows:

 Received PUSCH POWER: indicates the strength of the uplink signal

received by the cell.
 Transmission Power: indicates the transmit power of the terminal.
 PUSCH Total Noise(I+N): indicates the sum of the interference power
received by the cell and the noise power of the cell.
 PUSCH C/(I+N): indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the uplink traffic
channel.
 Bearer: indicates the demodulation and modulation mode used by the
cell.
 PUSCH Peak Throughput: indicates the peak throughput of the uplink
traffic channel.
The point analysis function can use output parameters of capacity simulation
results as input parameters for calculating pilot signals and service signals.
For example, if a concrete capacity simulation group is selected (as shown in
Figure 4-32), the signal receiving status at the point is calculated using the
uplink load, downlink load, and IOT of the group after the simulation is
complete. If you set Simulation Group to (None), the signal receiving status
at the point is calculated using the uplink load, downlink load, and IOT set in
the cell table.

4.4 Print
The U-Net can print display contents on the GIS map or print display contents
in a PDF file. The operation procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Set print parameters: Choose File > Print to display the Print Setting
window.
Figure 4-33 Entrance for printing setting

Figure 4-34 Printing setting window (1)
Template selection area
Parameter
setting area
Display area
Operation area
Parameters on the Page tab page are as follows:

 Name: indicates the template name. You can configure a template and
select a template when printing related results.
 Orientation: indicates the page orientation. The parameter value can be
Portrait or Landscape.
 Paper: indicates the paper size and source. Size: indicates the paper size,
such as A4. Source: indicates the paper source and the default value is
used.
 Scaling: indicates the print scale. Fit to Page indicates that the selected
map area is automatically adjusted to a proper size so that all contents are
printed on a piece of paper; Scale indicates that the print scale is
customized.
 Margins: indicates the page margins. Left indicates the left margin,
Right indicates the right margin, Top indicates the top margin, and
Bottom indicates the bottom margin.
Parameters on the Components tab page are as follows:
 Rulers: indicates whether to print the map ruler.

 Print Area: sets the print area. The default value is Full Map. That is,
the entire operation area is printed.
 Legend: sets the position of the legend information on the print map.
 Comments: indicates whether to add comments to the print paper. Also,
you can select the location of the comments. Position indicates the
position of the selected comments. On the Map indicates whether the
selected comments are displayed on the map.
Parameters on the Header/Footer tab page are as follows:

 Logo1 area: indicates whether to add logo1.

− Position: indicates the position of the selected logo.
− On the Map: indicates whether the selected logo is displayed on the
map.
 Logo2 area: The same as the Logo1 area.
 Title area: sets the title.
− Position: sets the position of the selected title.
− On the Map: indicates whether the selected title is displayed on the
map.
Contents of the title are set in the blank area.
 Header/Footer area: indicates whether to add the header and footer.
− Position: indicates the position of the selected header/footer.
− On the Map: indicates whether the selected header/footer is
displayed on the map.
Contents of the header/footer are displayed set in the blank area.
Step 2 Select a set template and click Preview to preview the print effect or click
Print to print the picture.

Figure 4-38 Print preview/print (1)
Figure 4-39 Print preview/print (2)
----End

4.5 Propagation Model Calibration

Before using the propagation model calibration function in the U-Net,
complete the following work:
 Import corresponding map data to the project.
 Import or create engineering parameters (Site, Transceiver, and Cell)
corresponding to the CW data of the project.
 Prepare the CW data file or DT data file. You can pre-process the data in
the file to avoid that the data amount is excessively large. If the Probe is
used for the drive test, the Assistant can be used to process the data file.
If other tools are used for the drive test, the data file is processed by
another tool.
The propagation model calibration function can be performed only after the drive test
data is pre-processed. The U-Net does not support the data pre-processing.
4.5.1 Description of the CW File

The U-Net supports the CW data exported by the Probe in TXT, CSV, and
XLS formats. The CW data must include the latitude/longitude information
and RSRP information about each Bin point. The CW data can also include
other optional information, such as PCI. Figure 4-40 shows the format of a
typical CW data file.
Figure 4-40 CW data file
4.5.2 Importing the Bin Point Information

On the Data tab page, right-click CW Measurement and choose Import.

Figure 4-41 Entrance for importing DT data
In the window, choose a CW file and click Open to display the Import File
window.
Figure 4-42 Window for importing the CW data

Parameters in the Import File window are described as follows:

 Parameters in the Configuration area are basic setting items for
importing files. You can click Save to save all settings of the window to
the file or click Load to load the preceding settings. 1st Data Row:
indicates the starting row of the data for import. Data in this row and the
subsequent rows is imported. Field Separator: indicates the method of
separating fields.
 Parameters in the Reference Transceiver area are setting items for Bin
point information. Name: indicates the name of the transceiver
corresponding to the Bin point data. Frequency: indicates the frequency
of the transceiver.
 Parameters in the Receiver area are setting items for the receiver
information. Currently, these parameters are not used in the propagation
model calibration of the U-Net.
 Parameters in the Field Mapping area setting items for Bin point import
data. Contents of a CW file can be previewed in the Field Mapping area
and columns are automatically matched. You need to confirm whether
the matched column information is correct. If the matched column
information is incorrect, you need to manually modify the matching
relationship.
After all data are set, click Import… to import the CW data. If the data is
successfully imported, the corresponding data is displayed in the navigation
tree and the corresponding Bin point is displayed on the GIS map.
Figure 4-43 Project display after the CW data is imported
4.5.3 Performing the Propagation Model Calibration

You can perform the propagation model calibration after the CW data is
imported. On the Data tab page, right-click CW Measurement and choose
Automatically Calibrate.

Figure 4-44 Starting the propagation model calibration from the navigation tree
Figure 4-45 Window for setting the propagation model calibration
You can set parameters in the Adjust Form window. Parameters are described
as follows:
 Select Propagation Model: selects the SPM model to be calibrated.
 Select Measurement File: selects the CW file whose data is used for the
calibration.
 Calibrate Limitation: Losses Per Clutter indicates whether the clutter
loss is considered. If this parameter is selected, the calibration item
contains the loss of clutters of each type. Standard Deviation indicates
the standard deviation allowed by the calibration. The default value is 8
dB. Usually, the deviation ranging from 8 dB to 11 dB is acceptable. Cell
Edge Coverage Probability indicates the coverage probability at the
cell. Retain the default value of 75% unless otherwise specified.
 Select the Parameters that You Want to Calibrate: selects the SPM
model coefficient participating in the calibration.

After all parameters are set, click Calibrate to perform the propagation model
calibration. If the calibration is successful, a window is displayed, as shown in
Figure 4-46.
Figure 4-46 Result of propagation model calibration
As shown in Figure 4-46, the table on the upper left part shows the data of
each coefficient in the SPM before and after the calibration. The lower left
part shows some statistics information. The figure on the right part shows the
path loss calculated by the propagation model, path loss during the actual
drive test, and path loss calculated after the calibration. If you are satisfied
with the calibration result, you can click Commit to submit the calibrated
coefficient to the propagation model. If you are not satisfied with the
propagation mode, you can click Next to set parameters and perform the
calibration again.
4.6 U-Net Map Calibration

After a map is imported, you may find that the Clutter layer has position
deviation with the Height layer or the Building layer, or has position deviation
with the imported engineering parameters. You can use the map calibration
function to manually adjust the position of a single layer.
On the Project Explorer pane, right-click Map and choose Adjust Map, as

Figure 4-47 Map calibration (1)
You can select the layer to the adjusted from the Map Layer down-down list
and set the step length for each adjustment (the step length ranging from 10 m
to 10000 m). Click the four direction buttons. Each time you click a direction
button, the selected layer is moved to the specified direction at the specified
step length.
Figure 4-49 shows the map adjustment effect. The Clutter layer is separated
from the Height layer.

The adjusted position is saved in the project. The index file of the map, however, is
not overwritten.
4.7 Interconnection with the MapInfo

The U-Net supports the import and export of polygons in the formats
supported by the MapInfo, the export of prediction results in the formats
supported by the MapInfo, and the display of prediction results in the
MapInfo.
4.7.1 Polygon
The U-Net supports the export of polygons in MIF or TAB formats. You can
set Export Type to Longitude/Latitude or X/Y. The operation procedure is
as follows:
Step 1 Right-click the polygon to be exported in the navigation tree (you can export
polygons in batches on the Polygon node) and choose Export.

Figure 4-50 Exporting polygons in MIF format (1)
Step 2 Set the export format, MIF or TAB.
Figure 4-51 Exporting polygons in MIF format (2)

When importing polygons in MIF or TAB formats from the U-Net, you can
set Import Type to Longitude/Latitude or X/Y. The operation procedure is
as follows:
Step 3 On the GEO tab page, right-click Polygons and choose Import.
Figure 4-52 Importing polygons in MIF format (1)
Step 4 Set the import format, MIF or TAB. Select the polygons to be imported.
Multiple polygons can be selected at the same time.
Figure 4-53 Importing polygons in MIF format (2)

----End
4.7.2 Exporting Prediction Results

The U-Net supports the export of prediction results in MIF format. The
Step 1 Right-click a prediction group and choose Export Results.
Figure 4-54 Exporting prediction results (1)
Step 2 In the Export Results window, set the export path, select MIF, and click
Export.

Figure 4-55 Exporting prediction results (2)
Only the information displayed on the GIS map can be exported.
----End
4.8 Interconnection with the Google Earth

The U-Net supports the display of base stations, cells, polygons, prediction
results, capacity simulation results, and drive test points on the Google Earth.
Step 1 Click the Switch To EarthView button on the tool bar to display the
configuration window.
Figure 4-56 Interconnection with the Google Earth (1)


 Sites: indicates whether to display base stations and sectors.
 Export Sites: indicates the sites to be displayed.
 Polygons: indicates whether to display polygons.
 Simulation Users: indicates whether to display the capacity simulation
results.
 Drive Test: indicates whether to display DT data.
 CW Measurement: indicates whether to display CW data.
 Transceiver Radius: indicates the radius of the sector displayed on the
client. Usually, the radius ranges from 1 m to 1000 m.
 Predictions: indicates whether to display the prediction results.
 Transparency: indicates the transparency of the prediction
results.
Step 2 After setting the preceding parameters, click View (to directly start the
Google Earth client in the U-Net) or Save (to save the results in a KMZ/KML
file and then start the Google Earth client separately to display the KMZ/KML
file).

 If you need to display multiple prediction result layers on the Google Earth
separately, you are advised to save the results in a KMZ/KML file and start the
Google Earth client separately to view the KMZ/KML file.
 If you start the Google Earth client using the U-Net, you have to start the client
for multiple times. You cannot control the layer display mode of the Google Earth
in the U-Net.
----End
4.9 Combining Maps with Different Precisions

You need to combine maps with different precisions in the following
scenarios:
Based on the Volcano ray tracing model, the prediction is performed using
maps of four precisions, 5 m, 20 m, 50 m, and 100 m. The area of the map
with the precision of 100 m is the largest and contains the areas of other three
maps. The four maps are overlapped, as shown in Figure 4-59.

Figure 4-59 Relations of maps with four precisions
100m
50m
20m
5m
The prediction at the boundary of the map may be abnormal when the Volcano
ray tracing model is used for the prediction of sites at the boundary of the map.
As shown in Figure 4-60, the Volcano mini model is used when the base
stations are at the boundary of the map with the precision of 5 m. The
prediction area is available only in the map with the precision of 5 m but is
unavailable in the map with the precision of 20 m. Therefore, the prediction
result is unavailable.
Figure 4-60 Prediction before maps are combined

During the simulation of the U-Net, the map data is set separately for the
Volcano ray tracing model. The map data imported by the U-Net cannot be
used by the Volcano ray tracing model. The setting of the map data for the
Volcano ray tracing model is shown in Figure 4-61.
Figure 4-61 Volcano map parameter settings
The solution to the problem is as follows:

Combine maps with different precisions to a map and set the combined map in
the Volcano model.
Take a project as example. There are maps with four precisions, 5 m, 20 m, 50
m, and 100 m. You need to combine disk file corresponding to the Clutter
layer and those corresponding to the Height layer.
Combine Clutter layers:
1. Combine menu files. Uniformly number clutter IDs of all maps in a
menu file. If clutter IDs are repeated and stand for different clutters, you
need to set clutter IDs again. Note that effective clutter IDs range from 1
to 254. Figure 4-62 shows clutter ID description of maps with four
precisions before these maps are combined.

Figure 4-62 Clutter ID description before maps are combined
Figure 4-63 shows the clutter ID after maps are combined.

Figure 4-63 Clutter ID description after maps are combined.

1 water
2 sea
3 wet land
4 suburban open area
5 urban open area
6 green land
7 forest
8 high buildings (height40m_60m)
9 high buildings (height>60m)
10 ordinary building (height 40m~20m)
11 parallel regular buildings (height<20m)
12 irregular large buildings
13 suburban village
14 irregular buildind (height<20m)
21 water
22 sea
23 wet land
24 suburban open area
25 urban open area
26 green land
27 forest
28 high buildings
29 ordinary building (height 40m~20m)
30 parallel regular buildings (height<20m)
31 irregular large buildings
32 irregular buildind (height<20m)
33 suburban village
40 high buildings (height40m_60m)
41 high buildings (height>60m)
51 Water
52 Forest
53 Green_land
54 Urban_Open_Area
55 SubUrban_Open_Area
56 High_Urban
57 Dense_Urban
58 Urban
59 SubUrban
60 Village
101 Water
102 Forest
103 Green_land
104 Urban
105 SubUrban
106 Open area

2. Modify the binary files of maps with four precisions based on the new
clutter ID and modify the data in the original binary files in batches using
the new clutter IDs. Saving modes of maps in different formats are
different. For example, in maps in planet format, two bytes stand for a
lattice. The first byte is usually 00 and the last byte is the real data. For
maps in other formats, such as bil or grc, one byte stands for a lattice.
3. Combine contents in index files of maps with different precisions to an
index file.
4. Copy binary files of maps with all precisions to the same directory of the
index file.
Combine Height files: You only need to copy the binary file to the same
directory of the index file and modify the index file.
Combine Vector layers: You cannot combine Vector layers. Vector layers of
maps with different precisions must be separated by different directories.
Combine Building layers: The folders can be used directly.
After the Volcano mini model imports the combined map, the prediction in the
area of the map with the precision of 20 m is normal, as shown in Figure 4-64.
Figure 4-64 Prediction figure of the combined map
4.10 Obtaining the Coordinate System of the Map

Based on the Map File
Generally, when you import a map in quick import mode, the projection
system is automatically imported to the U-Net. If you import a layer
(Clutter/Height/Building) separately, the U-Net does not read the projection

information. You need to manually set the coordinate system based on the
map file.
The coordinate system is determined based on the coordinate system of the
map. The coordinate system of the map is saved in the Projection file of the
Heights folder.
Step 1 Use the text editing tool to open the Projection file, as shown in Figure 4-65.
Figure 4-65 Format of the Projection file
The first line: GRS-1980 indicates that the ellipsoid model of the map is
GRS-1980.
The second line: 32 indicates the zone number of the projection zone. The
same projection zone has two models, southern hemisphere and northern
hemisphere. You can determine the hemisphere of the map based on the
last-digit data of the fourth line. When setting the coordinate system, select
32S for a map of the southern hemisphere and 32N for a map of the northern
hemisphere.
The third line: UTM indicates that the projection mode of the map is the
UTM mode.
The fourth line: The first data indicates latitude and the second data indicates
longitude. An origin point can be determined based on the latitude and
longitude. The third data indicates the offset in the X direction compared with
the origin point (a value larger than 0 indicates the offset in the western
direction and a value smaller than 0 indicates the offset in the eastern
direction). The fourth data indicates the offset in the Y direction compared
with the origin point (a value larger than 0 indicates the offset in the southern
direction and a value smaller than 0 indicates the offset in the northern
direction). The point after the offset is the coordinate origin point of the
current projection system.
Step 2 Set the coordinate system of the U-Net. On the GEO tab page, right-click
Map and choose Coordinate to display the Coordinate Systems window.

Figure 4-66 Setting the projection system (1)
Step 3 In the preceding example, the UTM projection mode is used. Therefore, set
Find in to WGS84 UTM zones. The longitude zone is 32 and the map is for
the northern hemisphere. Therefore, select the WGS81/UTM zone 32N line
and click Apply to apply the current projection system.

Figure 4-69 Selecting a coordinate system
----End
4.11 Tips for Using the U-Net

4.11.1 Hiding and Unhiding Columns of a Table
Function description: You can view data of some columns in the table and
customize whether to display the major properties.
This function can be used in Site, Transceiver, and Cell tables.
The following is an example of filtering the Cell Name field in the Cell table.
Step 1 Open the Cell table.

Figure 4-70 Cell table
Step 2 Deselect Cell Name.
Figure 4-71 Selecting the properties to be displayed
----End
4.11.2 Rollback
Function description: You can roll back operations of the latest three steps.
The rollback can be performed on the GIS map, such as moving sites or
polygons on the GIS map.
The rollback procedure is as follows:
Choose Edit > Undo.
Also, you can press Ctrl+Z to perform the rollback.

Figure 4-72 Performing the rollback on the GIS map
4.11.3 Custom Fields

Function description: You can add custom properties to the Site, Transceiver,
and Cell tables as required.
The following is an example of adding the area field to the Cell table. The
Step 1 Right-click the Cell table and choose Table Fields.

Figure 4-73 Custom fields (1)
Step 2 In the displayed Table Fields dialog box, click Add to add custom fields.

 Group: This parameter is not in use. The value is the same as that of
Legend.
 Legend: indicates the name of a custom field.
 Type: indicates the data type. The U-Net supports four data types, Text,
Integer, Double, and Boolean.
 Default Value: indicates the default value of a custom field.
 Choice List: indicates optional values of a custom field. If no values are
set, you can manually set values for the field in the table. If values are set,
you can only view and modify these set values.

4.11.4 Searching for NEs

Function description: You can quickly locate NEs on the GIS map. After NEs
are found, they are centered and highlighted in blue.
On the GIS map, you can search for NEs by the name of a site, transceiver, or
repeater. The operation procedure is as follows:
Choose Edit > Find.
Also, you can press Ctrl+F to search for NEs.

Figure 4-77 Searching for NEs (1)
Figure 4-78 Searching for NEs (2)
4.11.5 Moving a Site to a Higher Location

Function description: You can move the site to the highest location in the area
with the specified radius. The operation procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Right-click a site and choose Move to a Higher Location.

Figure 4-79 Moving a site to a higher location (1)
Step 2 Search for the highest point within the specified radius. The height of the
Building layer can be included.
Step 3 The site is automatically moved to the highest points in the specified area.

----End
4.11.6 Terrain View

Function description: You can query the terrain profile between any two
points to understand and analyze the terrain information about the two points.
Step 1 Choose Terrain View.
Figure 4-82 Viewing the terrain profile (1)
Step 2 Fix two points on the map. Select a point and move the cursor. The terrain
profile between the two points is displayed on the lower right part.

Figure 4-83 Viewing the terrain profile (2)
----End
4.11.7 Distance Measurement

Step 1 Choose Distance Measurement on the tool bar.
Figure 4-84 Distance measurement (1)
Step 2 On the GIS map, fix a point and move another point with the cursor. The
distance between the two points and the sliding coordinate information are
displayed on the lower part of the window.

Figure 4-85 Distance measurement (2)
----End

4.12 Summary of Propagation Model Parameters

4.12.1 Cost-Hata/Okumura Hata
Figure 4-86 Cost-Hata/Okumura Hata parameter window
 Diffraction Loss Method: indicates the diffraction loss calculation,

including Bullington, Epstein and Peterson, Deygout, and Atlas.
 Effect Tx Height Calculate Method: indicates the algorithm for
calculating the effective height of the transmitter antenna.
− AbsSpot: indicates the absolute height of the receiver.
− Height above the ground: indicates the height higher than the
ground surface.
− Height above the average ground: indicates the height higher than
the average ground surface.
− Spot Hr: indicates the relative height of the receiver.
− Slope At Receiver: indicates the relative height of the receiver slope.
− Enhanced Slope at receiver: indicates the relative height of the
enhanced receiver slope.
 Limitation to free space loss: indicates whether to limit the loss in the
free space. This parameter is not used during the actual calculation.
In the mountain area, the prediction results of the U-Net and those of the Atoll are
different. The diffraction function is enabled in the propagation mode of the Atoll. The
diffraction function of the U-Net is disabled by default. After the diffraction function
of the U-Net is manually enabled, the prediction results of the U-Net are basically the
same as those of the Atoll.

4.12.2 Clutter Related Hata

The Cost-Hata/Okumura Hata model does not take losses of different clutters
into consideration. The U-Net provides two Hata models related to clutters.
You can choose different propagation models for different clutters.
Figure 4-87 Clutter Related Cost Hata parameter window

Figure 4-88 Clutter Related Okumura Hata parameter window
Parameters
 Clutter: indicates all clutters contained in a map.
 Propagation Model: indicates the Cost-Hata/Okumura Hata model used
by each clutter in different scenarios.
 Loss: indicates the loss of the clutter.

4.12.3 SPM
Figure 4-89 SPM parameter window
Parameters
 Add building height: indicates whether to consider the building height.
 Clutter Loss Calculate Method: indicates the algorithm for calculating
the clutter loss. If the effective antenna length is calculated by adding the
building height to the altitude, the impact of the clutter (mainly refers to
the building) on the diffraction loss has been taken into consideration. If
the building height is not added, the impact of the building on the
diffraction loss is separately taken into consideration. In this case, the
clutter attenuation (mainly caused by the building) needs to be
calculated.
− Uniform: indicates the uniform weight.
− Triangular: indicates the triangular weight.
− Logarithmic: indicates the logarithmic weight.
− Exponential: indicates the exponential weight.
 Diffraction Loss Method: See the parameter description for Cost-Hata
parameters.
 Effect Tx Height Calculate Method: See the parameter description for
Cost-Hata parameters.
 Max Distance: indicates the distance limitation for calculating the clutter
loss. For example, if Max Distance is set to 50 m, this indicates that
only the clutter loss within 50 m between the receiver and the transceiver
is calculated when calculating the clutter loss. (If the distance between

the receiver and the transceiver is smaller than 50 m, only the clutter loss
within their distances is calculated.)
 Receiver on top clutter: indicates whether the receiver is on the top of
the clutter (mainly refers to the building).
 Limitation to free space loss: See the parameter description for
Parameters on the Clutter tab page are described as follows:
 Name: indicates the name of a clutter.
 Losses(dB): indicates the loss corresponding to the clutter.
 Clearance(m): indicates that the clutter loss within the specified scope is
taken into consideration.
 Rx Height(m): indicates the clutter height.
4.12.4 ITURP
Figure 4-90 ITURP parameter window
 Effect Tx Height Calculate Method: See the parameter description for

 Limitation to free space loss: See the parameter description for

4.12.5 Keenan-Motley
Figure 4-91 Keenan-Motley parameter window
Limitation to free space loss: See the parameter description for Cost-Hata
parameters.
4.12.6 Volcano
The property window of the Volcano model is shown in Figure 4-93.

Figure 4-92 Volcano model setting (1)
The Volcano_Urban model includes settings of parameters on tab pages such

as Settings, Clutters, Propagation, and Advanced tuning.
1. Parameter settings on the Settings tab page
 Altitude (DTM)/Elevation (DEM)/Clutter classes (DLU)/Clutter
heights (DHM)/3D Vectors/2D Vectors: indicates the map information.
When a map on the GEO tab page of the U-Net is imported, the Volcano
model can automatically obtains the map information.
 Vector height reference: indicates the settings of the vector altitude.
This parameter is activated only when the 3D vector layer is contained in
the map.
Prediction preferences: settings of prediction parameters
 Vertical analysis mode: indicates the vertical analysis mode. When the
imported map is a raster map, the parameter value is Raster favourite;
when the imported map contains a vector map, the parameter value is
Vector favorite.
 Coverage prediction mode: indicates the coverage prediction mode.
Regular: indicates the frequently-used calculation mode. Boost:
indicates the optimized calculation mode. In this mode, the calculation
time is decreased. Along linears: This mode is used for calculating the
linear vector maps. In this mode, the calculation time is decreased.
 Raster solution strategy: indicates the raster solution strategy.
 Tx inside map data building: indicates the height of the TX antenna.
Really indoor: indicates the indoor antenna. When the parameter value is
Really indoor, the indoor loss is taken into the consideration for the
Volcano model. Actually outdoor: indicates the outdoor antenna. When

the parameter value is Actually outdoor, the loss is not taken into
consideration for the Volcano model.
 Reception height: indicates the height of the reception antenna (height
of the mobile station).
 Spatial averaging: indicates the spatial averaging switch. The switch is
disabled by default. After the switch is enabled, the calibration precision
can be improved by 0.3 dB to 0.5 dB but the calculation time will be
increased by 15%.
2. Parameter settings on the Clutters tab page
You can set parameters related to the clutter type on the Clutters tab page.
Clutter types in the table are read by the Volcano model from the imported
map, including raster clutters and vector clutters, as shown in Figure 4-93.
 Loss: indicates the clutter loss.

 Linear loss(dB/m): indicates the linear loss of the clutter.
 Height: indicates the clutter height. This parameter can be set only in
raster maps.
 Clutter exclusion: indicates that users of the selected clutter types are
not considered when prediction signals are calculated.
 Prediction along linears: This area is used when the path loss matrix
file of the linear vector is imported. This parameter is set when
Coverage prediction mode is set to Along linears, and the preceding
clutter tables contain linear clutters.
3. Parameter settings on the Propagation tab page

 Global parameters area: indicates global parameters.

− a(deterministic loss weight): indicates the deterministic loss weight.
The typical value is 0.7.
− Antenna correction: indicates the antenna correction switch.
 Direct-path correction area: indicates the direction-path (of the free
space) correction factor. Afar and Bfar indicate the free-space loss
correction factor of reception equipment in a remote area.
 Multiple-path components area: indicates multiple-path calculation
parameters. This parameter must be selected when the multiple-path ray
tracing is enabled.
− Ray-tracing parameters: indicates ray tracing parameters.
Radius(m): indicates the ray tracing radius. Usually, the radius
ranges from 500 m to 800 m.
Street level mode: indicates the street level mode. Flat indicates flat
streets and Hilly indicates hilly streets.
− Multiple-path correction: indicates multiple-path correction factor.
Anear and Bnear indicate free-space loss correction factor of reception
equipment in a near area. The recommended value of Anear is 0 and
the recommended value of Bnear is 23 dB/dec.
− Max. number of interactions
Diffraction: indicates the maximum diffraction number. The
parameter value is an integer ranging from 0 to 1. The recommended
value is 1.

Reflection: indicates the maximum reflection number. The parameter

value is an integer ranging from 0 to 4. The recommended value is 2.
− Interaction weighting
Diffraction: indicates the diffraction weight. The parameter value
ranges from 0.5 to 1. The recommended value is 1.
Reflection: indicates the reflection weight. The parameter value
ranges from 0.5 to 1. The recommended value is 1.
Backward: indicates the weight of the returned lost signals. The
value ranges from 0.5 to 1. The recommended value is 1.
Allow antenna masking/unmasking: indicates the antenna ambiguity
matching. After the parameter is selected, the calculation time is
obviously decreased. The calculation results may be incorrect. It is
recommended that this parameter is not selected for multi-core CPUs.
4. Parameter settings on the Advance tuning tab page
 Enable clutter attenuation tuning: This parameter is used in 2D vector

maps with low precision. The clutter attenuation is taken into
consideration during the calibration.
 Enable clutter height tuning: This parameter is used in 2D vector maps
with low precision. The clutter height is taken into consideration during
the calibration.


Guide To Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using The U-Net V3R9

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Guide To Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using The U-Net V3R9

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Product Version Confidentiality level

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page i of 466

2 U-Net Operations ......................................................................................................... 5

3 Planning and Simulation.......................................................................................... 88

3.1.10 Method 1 ....................................................................................................................... 143

3.8.8 Displaying ASP Results on the Map ............................................................................... 309

4 Appendix ................................................................................................................... 381

2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page iv of 466

4.11.4 Searching for NEs ......................................................................................................... 431

2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page v of 466

Figure 1-1 Main interface of the U-Net............................................................................................. 1

Figure 2-1 Creating a LTE project (1) ............................................................................................... 5

Figure 2-2 Creating a LTE project (2) ............................................................................................... 6

Figure 2-3 Creating a LTE project (3) ............................................................................................... 6

Figure 2-4 Importing the map data (1) .............................................................................................. 7

Figure 2-5 Importing the map data (2) .............................................................................................. 8

Figure 2-6 Importing the map data (3) .............................................................................................. 8

Figure 2-7 Importing the map data (4) .............................................................................................. 9

Figure 2-8 Importing the map data (5) .............................................................................................. 9

Figure 2-9 Setting the coordinate .................................................................................................... 10

Figure 2-10 Selecting a projection ...................................................................................................11

Figure 2-11 Importing a Clutter layer ............................................................................................... 11

Figure 2-12 Importing a Clutter file ................................................................................................ 12

Figure 2-13 Effect after a Clutter is imported ................................................................................. 12

Figure 2-14 Importing a Height layer .............................................................................................. 13

Figure 2-15 Importing a Height file ................................................................................................ 14

Figure 2-16 Effect after a Height file is imported ........................................................................... 14

Figure 2-17 Importing a Building file ............................................................................................. 15

Figure 2-18 Importing a Building file ............................................................................................. 16

Figure 2-19 Effect after a Building file is imported ........................................................................ 16

Figure 2-20 Importing a Vector layer .............................................................................................. 17

Figure 2-21 Importing a Vector file ................................................................................................. 18

Figure 2-22 Effect after a Vector file is imported ............................................................................ 18

Figure 2-23 Importing a Geometry layer ........................................................................................ 19

Figure 2-24 Importing a Geometry file ........................................................................................... 19

2018-09-19 Huawei Confidential Page vi of 466

Figure 2-25 Effect after a Geometry file is imported ...................................................................... 20

Figure 2-27 Importing a text map.................................................................................................... 21

Figure 2-28 Effect after a text map is imported ............................................................................... 21

Figure 2-30 Importing a satellite picture ......................................................................................... 22

Figure 2-31 Setting the coordinate location of a satellite picture .................................................... 23

Figure 2-33 Setting the coordinate format of a map ........................................................................ 25

Figure 2-34 Setting the coordinate format of a map ........................................................................ 25

Figure 2-36 Clutter parameter setting (2) ........................................................................................ 27

Figure 2-37 Setting the propagation model (1) ............................................................................... 33

Figure 2-38 Setting the propagation model (2) ............................................................................... 33

Figure 2-39 Formats of MSI antenna files ...................................................................................... 34

Figure 2-40 Format of a .txt antenna file ......................................................................................... 35

Figure 2-41 Importing antenna information .................................................................................... 36

Figure 2-42 Importing/exporting antenna information .................................................................... 36

Figure 2-43 Antenna file ................................................................................................................. 37

Figure 2-44 Viewing the antenna property ...................................................................................... 38

Figure 2-45 Antenna property window ........................................................................................... 38

Figure 2-46 Setting the Site Equipment (1) ..................................................................................... 39

Figure 2-47 Setting the Site Equipment (2) ..................................................................................... 39

Figure 2-48 Importing site information (1) ..................................................................................... 40

Figure 2-49 Importing site information (2) ..................................................................................... 41

Figure 2-51 Viewing site information (2) ........................................................................................ 42

Figure 2-52 Setting the display mode of a site ................................................................................ 43

Figure 2-54 Effect after labels are set.............................................................................................. 44

Figure 2-57 Importing transceiver information (1) ......................................................................... 46